JP6897122B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a predetermined lottery result, a privilege game (for example, a small hit game) is executed, and the ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game. A gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege (for example, a winning game) is given has been proposed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2007-30008

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the privilege game is executed, the ball does not always pass through the specific area. Therefore, when the privilege game in which the ball does not pass through the specific area is executed a plurality of times, the game is played. There was a risk that the player's willingness to play would decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's willingness to play.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is displayed with a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition and identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means. The display means, the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period , and then stopping and displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the specific discrimination result on the display means. When the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the above is stopped and displayed, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. , The variable ball entry means that can be changed from the closed state where the ball is difficult to enter to the open state where the ball can enter, the specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and the ball passing through the specific area. It has a privilege granting means capable of granting an advantageous privilege to the player based on the above, and an advantageous state in which the ball can pass to the specific area and a more difficult state for the ball to pass than the advantageous state. The variable means capable of alternately changing the disadvantageous state and the variable means are changed to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state, and then changed to the one state. With the period as one operation period, the variable control means for variably controlling the variable means and the sphere so as to reach the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. the benefits game possess a specific game state setting means for setting a plurality of times executable particular gaming state, the a, the predetermined condition is a predetermined determination result other than determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means It can be established when the above-mentioned privilege game is continuously determined a predetermined number of times, and the privileged game is the variable ball entry so that the ball can easily pass through the specific area as compared with the first type and the first type. At least a second type in which the means is variable is set .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means for displaying the discrimination result. After dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the identification for showing the specific discrimination result on the display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, the ball enters the ball. Based on a variable ball-entry means that can be changed from a difficult closed state to an open state in which a ball can enter, a specific area provided in the variable ball-entry means, and a ball passing through the specific area. It has a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege advantageous to the player, and an advantageous state in which the ball can pass to the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state. The variable means that can be changed alternately, and the period from when the variable means is changed to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state to the next change to the one state is once. As the operation period, the variable control means for variably controlling the variable means and the privilege game so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state that can be executed a plurality of times, and the predetermined condition is such that the determination result by the determination means is continuous with a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result a predetermined number of times. In the above-mentioned privilege game, the variable ball-entry means is changed so that the ball can easily pass through the first type and the specific area as compared with the first type. At least the second type is set.

Therefore , there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which enlarged a part area of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a front view which shows the inside of the 1st ball entry device. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a random number table for the first hit, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is the first schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the small hit type selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 1, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 2. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the variation pattern selection table for small hits schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario a, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario b. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit scenario a. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the hit scenario b schematically. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V-gate scenario, and (c) is a precursor effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect type selection table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the continuous production variation pattern selection table (additional prize). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit medium effect pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the precursor effect variation pattern selection table. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of executing the big hit game via the small hit game, and (b) is the timing showing the flow of executing the big hit game based on the lottery of the special symbol. It is a chart. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of continuous production and the operation control of various devices. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the continuous jackpot effect and the operation control of various devices. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation execution determination process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the thru gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the processing at the time of passing through a door executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the processing at the time of passing V executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the V gate drive control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit ending control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the V gate command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning command reception process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot start effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit start effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the precursor variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the continuous effect type selection process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the V passability fluctuation determination process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the V counter update process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) shows the small hit opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the door passage command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the V passage command processing executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the SW-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the second embodiment. It is a figure. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 2 in the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. FIG. 5C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the contents of the variation pattern selection table for small hits in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic showing the contents of the small hit scenario a in the second embodiment. FIG. 6C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b in the second embodiment. (A) is a timing chart schematically showing the timing between the special symbol game when the normal fluctuation pattern in the second embodiment is selected and the operation of the V gate 650d, and (b) is the timing chart. 2 is a timing chart schematically showing the timing of the special symbol game when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected and the operation of the V gate 650d. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the counter subtraction process executed by MPU in the main control unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol variation processing 2 executed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit ending control process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V-passing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit according to the third embodiment. It is a figure. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the random number table 3 per 1st in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table in the third embodiment, and (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table in the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table for special figure 2 in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification 1 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view which shows typically the internal structure of the winning unit of the pachinko machine in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit in a state where the second opening / closing member is closed in the modified example 2 of the third embodiment, and (b) is a modified example of the third embodiment. 2 is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit in a state where the second opening / closing member is open. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the opening / closing drive and the ball flow of the 3rd variable winning apparatus in the modification 2 of the 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is an enlarged front view of the inside of the second variable winning device 650, FIG. 5 is a front view of the inside of the first ball winning device 64, and FIG. 6 is the back view of the pachinko machine 10. It is a figure.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

The inner frame 12 includes a large number of nails, a winning opening 63, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a and a second ball entry port A64b (see FIG. 5), and a second ball entry port B640b. A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a second ball winning device 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 650, and the like is detachably mounted from the front side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheets of glass is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. It has become.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

Further, the front frame 14 has a frame left button 22a provided on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) and a frame right button 22b provided on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b (hereinafter referred to as the frame button 22) are arranged at intervals (about 500 mm) that are difficult to operate with one hand, and when operating both buttons, Needs to take his hand off the operating handle 51 and use both hands.

The frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) can be used, for example, to change the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or to change the effect content of the super reach. It is operated by the player when changing it. Further, as will be described in detail later, an effect of simultaneously operating both the frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) is also executed.

The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "sky stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, the variation effect and reach effect performed when the ball enters the so-called start winning opening (starting winning) such as the first entry opening 64a, the second entry opening A64b, and the second entry opening B640b, which will be described later, etc. The various productions of are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, "city stage" → " It is changed repeatedly in the order of "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"-> ... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and driving of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryobako" or "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. Be told. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, in addition to a large number of nails for ball guidance (only a part of which is shown) and a windmill (not shown). , Rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a and a second ball entry port A64b, second ball entry device 640 having a second ball entry port B640b, first The variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is on the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). It is attached. General winning opening 63, first entry device 64 having first entry opening 64a and second entry opening A64b, second entry device 640 having second entry opening B640b, first variable winning device 65, first The 2 variable winning device 650 and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a decorative movable accessory that moves according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so that the range is limited. It is possible to use the game area in three dimensions, and there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the plastic ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while the ball enters the second ball entry port (second ball entry port A64b or The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate when the ball enters the second entry port B640b).

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, or stop symbols. Indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a big hit, a symbol corresponding to a small hit, or a missed symbol depending on the lighting state, the type of the big hit or the type of the small hit is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls depends on the lighting state. In addition to showing, the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error are displayed by the 7-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors notifies various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. It is configured in.

In addition, in this embodiment, the entry into the first entry opening 64a and the second entry opening (the second entry opening A64b or the second entry opening B640b) is suspended up to four times, respectively. However, the maximum number of hold times is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 times or less (for example, 2 times) or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a lottery for the first special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed, and the ball is the second entrance A64b or the second. When the ball enters the ball entrance B640b (hereinafter referred to as the second ball entry 64b, 640b), a lottery for the second special symbol (one of the first symbols) is performed. Further, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, a lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed.

In the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol) performed for entering the ball into the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, 640b, the special symbol is a big hit or Whether or not a small hit is won is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined.

When the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is a hit is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state (big hit game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (after the opening period elapses), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, opens for a predetermined period. It is opened (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Then, after repeating the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (the ending period elapses).

It should be noted that, by winning one ball in the first variable winning device, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 (opening period) and the specified door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 are performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period) and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed (interval period) during the opening operation of the specific door 65f that is repeatedly executed are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large number of balls (about 100 balls (10 rounds x 10 rounds)) win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, so that a larger number of prize balls (about 1000 balls) than usual (100 pieces x 10 shots)) will be paid out.

As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot of a special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from two types, "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see FIG. 10 (b)), and the number of times according to the jackpot type. Only the specific door 65f is opened. Further, after the end of the special gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is given to the player a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times).

Here, in the time-saving game state (time-saving medium), the hit probabilities of the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol (normal symbol) are the same as in the normal state, but the first symbol (special symbol) and the second symbol are the same. The fluctuation time of the symbol (ordinary symbol) is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640, which is opened when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit, is extended. (For example, 1 second (0.5 second open twice)). That is, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the second entry port B640b than in the normal game state.

In addition, when it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (small hit game), and the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period (for example, for example. It will be released until 1.5 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls have been won.

As a result, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Although details will be described later, a V discharge flow path 650e3 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650 described above (see FIG. 4), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the V discharge flow path 650e3. When the switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects (hereinafter, referred to as passing through a specific area), a jackpot game is given.

Details will be described later, but if you win a small hit with a special symbol, you can refer to the first small hit type selection table 202c and choose from three types: "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". The small hit type of is selected (see FIG. 11 (a)). Then, the small hit game is executed based on the selected small hit type. Further, in each small hit type, "big hit C" or "big hit D" is set as the type of big hit that can be given as a result of the small hit game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a game aiming for a big hit by a special symbol lottery (so-called type 1 game) and a small hit by a special symbol lottery, and a second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game. It has a game property (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixer) that has a game (so-called type 2 game) aiming at a big hit by passing a winning ball to a specific area.

By having such playability, the player can aim for a big hit with a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the tiredness of the game.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed for the passage of the ball to the through gate (ordinary symbol start port) 67, the hit / fail determination of the ordinary symbol is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second) to the second ball entry port B640b. The ball becomes easy to enter. That is, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball is likely to enter the second entry port B640b, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

Further, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device (not shown), and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 180 seconds) is set. After that, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device, the number of passes is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Will be done.

As described above, the special symbol jackpot types include "big hit A" and "big hit B" given by lottery of special symbols, and a detection switch (specific area) 650e5 provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3. There are four types, "big hit C" and "big hit D", which are given by detecting a sphere. As shown in FIG. 10B, each jackpot type is set so that the operation content of the specific door (attacker) 65f in the jackpot game and the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed are different. Specifically, "big hit A" is a big hit (2R (round) big hit) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened twice, and is in a time-saving game state (special) after the big hit game is completed. The fluctuation time of the symbol and the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is lengthened), but the period until the special symbol fluctuates eight times is set (the number of time reductions is eight). "Big hit B" is a big hit (5R (round) big hit) in which the specific door (attacker) 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened 5 times. The period until it fluctuates is set (time reduction 8 times). In any jackpot, the end condition of one round is set when 10 balls win the first prize device 65 or when the opening time of the first prize device 65 has passed 30 seconds. When the conditions for ending the first round are satisfied, the specific door 65f is closed and the first round is completed.

As described above, in the jackpot game in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot and the presence / absence of the time-saving game state after the jackpot game are changed according to the type of the jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be fixed regardless of the type of jackpot.

In addition, the period of the "short-time game state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is "big hit A", the special symbol changes three times after the end of "big hit A". When the period is set to the time-saving game state and the "big hit B" is reached, the period from the end of the "big hit B" to the change of the special symbol 6 times may be set to the time-saving game state.

Further, the period of the "time saving game state" given after the end of the big hit may be changed according to the game state at the time of winning the big hit. For example, if the "big hit A" is won in the "normal game state", the "big hit" The period from the end of "A" to the change of the special symbol three times is set as the time-saving game state, and if the "big hit A" is won in the "time-saving game state", the period from the end of "big hit A" to the change of the special symbol eight times The period of may be set as a time-saving game state. As a result, even if a jackpot of the same type (for example, jackpot A) is won, a privilege that is advantageous to the player according to the game state (normal game state or time-saving game state) at the time of winning (time-saving game state). It is possible to make the contents of.

As explained above, by making it possible to provide various benefits to the player according to the winning jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the benefits are given to the player. In addition to the expectation of doing things, it is possible to have an expectation of the content of the benefits to be given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the jackpot game in the present embodiment, during one round, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 continues to open until the end condition of the round is satisfied, but the first variable winning device 65 continues to open within one round. The specific door 65f may be configured to open and close a plurality of times. For example, in the "big hit A", the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is first opened in the first round of the 2R (round) big hits. The door may be opened for 1.5 seconds (first opening), the specific door 65f may be closed once, and then opened for 28.5 seconds (second opening).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to open the game for a long period of time after making it seem like a big hit that cannot secure the ball even though the big hit is won with a special symbol, and improve the interest of the game. Can be done. Further, for example, when it is not determined as a big hit in the special symbol lottery (when it is determined as a miss), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds). As a result of the lottery with a special symbol, the player won the jackpot A at the timing when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 was opened for 1.5 seconds (first opening). It is not possible to grasp whether or not the player has won the prize, and there is an effect that the operation of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 can be noticed and the game can be enjoyed.

Even when the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened a plurality of times in one round, the end condition of the round is the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 in one round. It may be the same as the jackpot that opens only once. For example, the timing when the total number of seconds of the open state in one round reaches 30 seconds and the total of the game balls won in one round are 10. It is good to use the timing of the individual pieces as the end condition of the round. By configuring in this way, the end condition of the round can be unified, so that a part of the control processing during the jackpot can be shared. ..

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, as a privilege after the big hit game, a time-saving game state is given according to the big hit type, but even if another privilege is given as a privilege given after the big hit game. Often, for example, a high probability state in which the jackpot probability or the small hit probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the normal gaming state may be given for a predetermined period. In this case, the predetermined period is the period until the next big hit is won, the period until the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), and the normal gaming state with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). It is possible that the lottery will be held and the period until the lottery will be won. In addition, as other benefits, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased from the normal gaming state, and the opening pattern of each winning device executed in the big hit game or the small hit game is changed to an opening pattern that is advantageous to the player. Benefits etc. can be considered.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit is set with a predetermined probability (397/399) as the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIG. 10A). As mentioned above, there are three types of small hits, "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". A specific game state (small hit game) is executed based on.

As shown in FIG. 11A, specifically, "small hit A" is a small operation that opens the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 once (1.5 seconds). It is a hit, and when the detection switch 650e5 detects that the ball has passed through the V discharge flow path 650e3 during the small hit game (passes through a specific area), the big hit type (V passage) given after the small hit game is completed. The jackpot D is set as the jackpot of time). "Small hit B" is a small hit that executes the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and is a big hit D as a big hit when passing through V. Is set. "Small hit C" is a small hit that executes the operation of opening the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 three times (0.1 seconds x 3 times), and is a big hit C as a big hit when passing through V. Is set.

That is, since the "small hit A" opens the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 for a longer period than the other small hits, the second variable winning device 650 is compared with the other small hits. It is a small hit that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a provided in.

Here, the configuration of the lower right region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view in which the lower right region III of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is enlarged and the cover body covering the front surface of the second variable winning device 650 is removed. The cover body covering the front surface of the second variable winning device 650 is composed of a transparent member whose inside is visible.

In addition, in the cover body, at least the portion covering the ball path in the second variable winning device 650 may be configured by a half mirror. With this configuration, when the decorative lamp (light emitting means) provided in the decorative portion 650 g, which will be described later, emits light, the ball path in the second variable winning device 650 becomes visible to the player and is decorated. When the lamp is not emitting light (turns off), the ball path in the second variable winning device 650 can be made difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, for example, when the game state is the game state (small hit game state) in which the game ball is won by the second variable winning device 650, the decorative lamp provided on the decorative portion 650 g is turned on to the player. Therefore, it is possible to easily notice that the player is in a gaming state aiming at the second variable winning device 650, and the player can use the second variable winning device in a gaming state other than the non-gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Since the ball path in the 650 can be made invisible (difficult), a guiding member that guides the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 to the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific region, because it can be made invisible (difficult). By deforming the (V gate) 650d, the act of passing the game ball through the V discharge flow path 650e3 and the act of grasping the operation timing of the guiding member (V gate) 650d and changing the special symbol at an irregular timing. ) Has the effect of making it difficult to perform. The internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 used in the pachinko machine 10 is in an open state in which a game ball can be entered by a door 650f configured with a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board side. Variable to a difficult closed state. In the closed state, the opening of the second specific winning opening 650a is completely covered by the door 650f, and the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the door 650f toward the lower left direction of the front view of the game board 13.

Further, in the open state, the door 650f is retracted toward the inside of the game board 13 so that the second specific winning opening 650a is opened. Further, on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650, on the upstream side of the door 650f (on the right side of the front view of the game board 13), an inclined surface for rolling the game ball toward the door 650f is formed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 3, the main flow of the ball flowing down the right side region of the game board 13 will be described. The ball flowing down the right region of the game board 13 passes through a passage path having a passage width equivalent to that of one game ball formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2), and passes through the lower right of the game board 13. Reach the realm. The ball that has reached the lower right region flows down toward the first variable winning device 65 that is opened during the jackpot game, and if the first variable winning device 65 is closed, then the second variable winning device described above is used. It flows down to device 650.

The ball that rolls on the upper surface of the second variable winning device 650 in the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board flows down toward the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game. When the door 650f is closed, it rolls on the closed door 650f, passes through a through gate (normal symbol start port) 67 that starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and flows down to the second ball entry device 640. To do. Then, the ball that has reached the bottom of the game board 13 passes through the out port 71 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

With this configuration, the small hit game state, the time saving game state, and the big hit game state, which are advantageous states for the player, are all executed in a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right area of the game board 13. It is possible to reduce the control of notifying the player of the change of the game method (left-handed notification) due to the change of the game state, and also reducing the time and effort for the player to operate the operation handle 51 due to the change of the game state. You can play the game easily.

Further, by providing the first variable winning device 65 on the most upstream side of the lower right region, it is possible to efficiently win a right-handed game ball during the jackpot game. Further, by providing the second ball entry device 640 on the downstream side of the normal symbol start port 67, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start port 67 enters the second ball entry port B640b of the second ball entry device 640. It becomes possible to make a ball, and the fired ball can be efficiently used for a game. In addition, by providing the second ball entry device 640 on the downstream side of the lower right region, the first variable winning device can give a greater privilege to the player than entering the second ball entry device 640. The winning of the game ball to the 65 or the second variable ball entry device 650 is not hindered by the driving of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640, and the player is prevented from giving discomfort during the game. can do.

Next, the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open so that the ball can enter. ing.

First, an outline of the configuration of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. When the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is variably controlled so that the door 650f is in an open state in which the ball can be won.

Here, the small hit game will be described. The small hit game is a game state in which, when the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is the determination result corresponding to the small hit, the transition is made after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (the symbol is confirmed), and the predetermined period (opening period). This is a game in which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened after the lapse of time so that the ball can enter the second variable winning device 650. Although detailed description will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of small hit types are set (small hit A to small hit C), and the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened (a mode in which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The open pattern) and the types of big hits that can be given after the small hit game is completed are set to be different.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is configured to pass through either the V discharge flow path 650e3 or the normal discharge path 650e4, which will be described later, and be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. Then, the ball passes through the detection switch 650e5, which is a specific region in the V discharge flow path 650e3, so that the execution of the big hit game is started after the small hit game is completed.

Therefore, when the small hit game is started, the player shoots a ball so as to aim at the second variable winning device 650, and the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 passes through a specific area (detection switch 650e5). It is possible to play a game while paying attention to the flow of the ball so as to do so, which has the effect of increasing the motivation to play.

Returning to FIG. 4A, each configuration will be described. The second variable winning device 650 is provided with a horizontally long and short second specific winning opening 650a in a substantially central portion of the upper surface thereof, and the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state in which a ball can win (easily). A door 650f is provided to change the ball to a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) to win a prize.

The door 650f is configured by a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the open state of the second specific winning opening 650a shown in FIG. 4A, the door 650f retracts inside the game board 13. In the closed state of the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball is configured to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a having an opening width (50 mm) capable of simultaneously winning a plurality of prizes. The door 650f is configured so that the balls can roll in a row on the upper surface of the door 650f in a state where the door 650f is projected so as to completely cover the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, a plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f at the timing when the second specific winning opening 650a changes from the closed state to the open state can win a prize in the second variable winning device 650 at the same time.

The balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 are aligned in a row by an alignment path (not shown), and then pass through the pass detection switch 650a1 that detects the winning of the second variable winning device 650. Specifically, an alignment path in which the width direction of the second specific winning opening 650a (horizontal direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A) is the flow direction is arranged at a lower position to receive the ball won from the second specific winning opening 650a. To do. The alignment path is composed of a passage width (about 15 mm) through which one sphere can pass, and is configured to allow the sphere to flow down in the lower right direction (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A). ing.

With this configuration, when a plurality of balls are rolling on the door 650f and the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the plurality of balls rolling on the door 650f are aligned. It will fall along the flow direction of the road, and it will be possible to efficiently align the winning balls.

An intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided in the second variable winning device 650, and a first flow path 650e1 in which the sphere flows down the upper side of the intermediate partition member 650f3 and a second flow path 650e1 in which the sphere flows down the lower side of the intermediate partition member 650f3. A flow path 650e2 is formed. The first flow path 650e1 is a flow path that communicates with the normal discharge flow path 650e4, and the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e4 and is collected at a collection port (not shown) to the outside of the gaming machine. Is discharged. The normal discharge flow path 650e4 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e6 for detecting the balls flowing down the normal discharge flow path 650e4, and is configured to be able to calculate the number of balls flowing down the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

On the other hand, the second flow path 650e2 is a flow path provided with a stopper (ball stop member) 650c and a V gate 650d, which will be described later, and the ball can flow down to either the normal discharge flow path 650e4 or the V discharge flow path 650e3. It is formed as a flow path. The V discharge flow path 650e3 is provided with a passage detection switch 650e5 for detecting a ball flowing down the flow path, and a jackpot game is performed after the small hit game is completed based on the passage detection switch 650e5 detecting the ball. It is configured to run. The ball that has flowed down the V discharge flow path 650e3 is collected at a collection port (not shown) and discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

The flow of the sphere into the first flow path 650e1 or the second flow path 650e2 described above is switched by the flow path switching member 650b. The flow path switching member 650b is rotatably supported by a shaft support portion 650b1 provided at one end thereof, and is pushed downward by a falling ball to rotate to a contact position where it comes into contact with the regulation piece 650b2. It is configured as follows. When the flow path switching member 650b rotates to the contact position, the flow path is switched so that the sphere pushing down the flow path switching member 650b flows down to the second flow path 650e2.

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is provided with a leaf spring (not shown) as an urging member for urging the shaft support portion 650b1 in the upward direction, and is in an initial position (not shown) from a state of being pushed down by a ball. It is configured to be able to return to the position shown by the solid line in 4 (a)).

Further, the flow path switching member 650b is configured such that its tip portion 650b3 can be refracted in one direction by a refracting portion 650b4. Specifically, it is configured to be refractable with respect to the lower surface side of the flow path switching member 650b, and the tip portion 650b3 is configured to bend downward with respect to the flow path switching member 650b. As a result, when the flow path switching member 650b rotates (returns) from the contact position to the initial position, even if there is an obstacle in the rotation range of the tip portion 650b3, the tip portion 650e3 is refracted to the initial position. It is configured to be able to rotate (return) to.

Next, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 will be described. The stopper (ball stop member) 650c provided in the second flow path 650e2 is configured to be movable at a ball stop position for stopping the flow of the ball and a release position for allowing the flow of the ball. The control for moving the stopper (ball stop member) 650c will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25, but when the small hit game is executed, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is moved to the ball stop position, and then for a predetermined time (the present embodiment). It is controlled to move to the release position after 4.5 seconds).

In a state where the stopper (ball stop member) 650c described above is located at the ball stop position, the ball stays by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c as shown in FIG. 4 (a). The stagnant sphere comes into contact with the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, and the flow path switching member 650b is restricted from rotating to the contact position (rotating downward). .. In this state, when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 passes through the passage detection switch 650a1 and falls on the flow path switching member 650b, the ball flows down the first flow path described above.

In the state where the ball is retained by the stopper 650c, when the flow path switching member 650b moves upward, the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b3 buffers the retained ball. As described above, since the tip portion 650b3 of the flow path switching member 650b is configured to be refractable, the flow path switching member 650b rotates (returns) to the initial position with the tip portion 650b3 refracted downward.

Then, the flow path switching member 650b that has rotated (returned) to the initial position is pushed downward again by the subsequent sphere that won the prize, but the tip portion 650b3 comes into contact with the sphere that is retained in the retention position. Therefore, the downward movement is restricted, and the tip portion 650b3 refracted by the refracting portion 650b4 returns to the normal state (the state shown by the solid line in FIG. 4A).

Next, the V gate (guidance member) 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described. The V gate 650d has a guidance state (guidance position) in which the ball can pass through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 and a guidance state (induction position) in which the ball is in the V discharge flow path 650e3. The passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 is configured to be alternately changed to a regulated state (regulated position) which is a difficult state (position) to pass through, and is always changed while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. A certain operation is being executed repeatedly. When the V-gate 650d in the pachinko machine 10 is attached to the game board 13, the upper surface of the V-gate 650d is provided with an inclination for the ball to flow down to the lower left side (lower left side from the viewpoint of FIG. 4A). , It is configured to cover the rolling surface 650f1 on the downstream side of the stopper 650c. This is when the sphere flows down smoothly to the second flow path 650e2 when the V gate 650d flows down at the timing of the regulated state, and when the sphere flows down at the timing of the V gate 650d in the guided state. This is to ensure that the sphere is guided to the V discharge flow path 650e3. A detailed explanation will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4B, the positional relationship of each configuration provided in the second variable winning device 650 will be described in detail. The upstream end side of the intermediate partition member 650f3 is provided at a position communicating with the downstream end side of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position, and on the downstream end side, the flowing ball goes to the normal discharge flow path 650e4. It is provided up to a position protruding to the left side of the partition wall 650f2 provided for partitioning the V discharge flow path 650e3 and the normal discharge flow path 650e4 so as to surely flow down.

More specifically, there is a gap (for example,) between the upstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 and the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position so as not to interfere with the rotational operation of the flow path switching member 650b. , A gap of less than half a sphere) is provided, and the upstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 has a predetermined step (a predetermined step (a gap) with respect to the upper surface downstream end of the flow path switching member 650b located at the initial position. For example, a step of less than half a sphere) is provided. This means that when the subsequent ball that has won the second prize device 650 falls onto the flow path switching member 650b, even if the flow path switching member 650b moves slightly in the vertical direction, the ball can be smoothly moved to the second flow path. This is to let it flow down. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball flow from being affected even if a slight error occurs in the mounting position of the stopper 650c and the flow path switching member 650b. Further, even if the installed state of the pachinko machine 10 has some error with respect to the horizontal, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from affecting the ball flow.

Next, the configuration on the downstream side of the intermediate partition member 650f3 will be described. The downstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 is formed in an arc shape downward, and the height position of the downstream end facing downward (a4 in FIG. 4B) and the upper end of the partition wall 650f2. The distance from the height position (a2 in FIG. 4B) is less than one sphere. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a sphere flowing down the first flow path 650e1 from flowing down to the V discharge flow path 650e3.

Desirably, the distance between the height position of the upper end of the partition wall 650f2 (a2 in FIG. 4B) and the height position of the downstream end of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (a4 in FIG. 4B) is a sphere. It is good to have less than one piece. With this configuration, when the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 merge, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 is at a higher position. Therefore, it is possible to preferentially flow down the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2. Therefore, by colliding with the sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 will stay, and in that state, the V gate 650d will be in an inductive state, and the V discharge flow path 650e3 will be sphered. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which an unexpected game such as a flow of a ball is performed.

Next, the detailed configuration of the V gate 650d will be described. The V gate 650d is configured so that the height position on one end side of the upper surface (a1 in FIG. 4B) is higher than the height position on the other end side in contact with the partition wall 650f2 (a2 in FIG. 4B). The other end side is configured to be substantially at the same height as the upper end portion of the partition wall 650f2. With this configuration, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the V gate 650d can be smoothly flowed down into the normal discharge flow path 650e4.

The upper surface of the V gate 650d may have a downward slope in the lower left direction, and the height of the other end may be higher than that of the upper end of the partition wall 650f2. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface of the partition wall 650f2 has a flat shape, but it may have an inclined shape in the same direction as the upper surface of the V gate 650d. By forming in this way, the sphere can flow down to the normal discharge flow path 650e4 more smoothly. Further, a gap may be provided between the V gate 650d and the partition wall 650f2 so as not to hinder the rolling of the ball.

Next, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape toward the V discharge flow path 650e3, and the height position on the upstream end side of the rolling surface 650f1 (a3 in FIG. 4B) is the partition wall 650f2. It is configured to be lower than. With this configuration, when the V gate 650d is in the guided state (the state in which the V discharge flow path 650e3 is open), the sphere that has flowed down jumps over the partition wall 650f2 and flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e4. It is possible to prevent problems that occur.

In the present embodiment, the rolling surface 650f1 is formed in an arc shape, but any shape may be used as long as the ball rolling on the rolling surface 650f flows down to the V discharge flow path 650e3, for example, in the lower left direction. It may be an inclined linear shape.

Further, in the present embodiment, the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1 are configured to be substantially in contact with each other, but a space may be provided between the V gate 650d and the rolling surface 650f1. With this configuration, the shape of the V gate 650d can be made simple, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 4A to 4B, the flow of the balls winning the second variable winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 4A is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, showing an open state in which the door 650f is open so that the ball can enter. It is a figure. FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the internal configuration of the second variable winning device 650 arranged on the game board 13, in which the door 650f is closed so that the ball cannot be entered (difficult). It is a figure which shows the closed state.

The small hit game is started, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 first flows down an alignment path (not shown), and the passing is detected by the passing detection switch 650a1. After that, the first winning ball pushes down the flow path switching member 650b, flows down to the second flow path 650e2, and stays at the stopper 650c located at the ball stop position (see FIG. 4A). When a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has passed from the start of the small hit game, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the ball retained by the stopper 650c flows down the second flow path 650e2 toward the V gate 650d. (See FIG. 4 (b)). When the sphere flows down the V gate 650d, if the V gate 650d is in the guided state, it flows down the V discharge flow path 650e3, and if the V gate 650d is in the regulated state, it rolls on the V gate 650d and the normal discharge flow path. Flow down 650e4.

Next, the flow of the subsequent balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, when the subsequent ball flows down in the second variable winning device 650, the ball has already stayed at the staying position, and the flow path switching member 650b has moved (returned) to the initial position. Is. In this state, the winning ball rolls on the flow path switching member 650b and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 while flowing down the upper surface of the intermediate partition member 650f3 (see FIG. 4A).

Further, the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650a1, the ball that has flowed down the V discharge flow path 650e3 is detected by the passage detection switch 650e5, and the ball that has flowed down the normal discharge area 650e4. Is detected by the passage detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning balls (total number of balls detected by the passage detection switch 650a1) and the total number of ejected balls (total number of balls detected by the passage detection switches 650e5 and 650e6) can be detected. Since it is possible to monitor whether the winning balls are discharged within a predetermined time, for example, a ball clogging that occurs in the second variable winning device 650 or a ball intentionally in the second variable winning device 650. It becomes possible to easily detect fraudulent acts that leave behind.

The following detection sensor may be provided in the second variable winning device 650. For example, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is located at the initial position or the contact position may be provided. By providing such a switch, it is possible to easily detect a defect in the flow path switching member 650b. Further, a switch capable of detecting that the flow path switching member 650b is continuously located at the contact position for a predetermined time may be provided. By providing such a switch, it is possible to easily grasp the state in which the flow path switching member 650b has not moved (returned) to the initial position for some reason.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hit game given when the small hit is won is started as a result of the special symbol game, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. , The second specific winning opening 650a is opened. When a ball wins in the second variable winning device 650 that is in the open state, one ball is retained by the stopper 650c as a ball that can pass over the V gate 650d. Subsequent balls that have won the second variable winning device 650 flow down the first flow path 650e1 and pass through the normal discharge path 650e4. When the predetermined time elapses, the door 650f is closed and the second specific winning opening is closed, so that no new winning is generated in the second variable winning device 650. Then, when a predetermined time elapses thereafter, the stopper 650c moves to the release position, and the stagnant ball flows down toward the V gate 650d. When the sphere reaches the V gate 650d, if the V gate 650d is in the guided state (open state), it passes through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 and a big hit is given. Will be done. On the other hand, if the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (closed state), it rolls on the V gate 650d and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 while flowing down the second flow path 650e2.

The sphere that has flowed down the first flow path 650e1 and the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 will merge at the merging position 650e7, but at the merging position 650e7, the sphere that has flowed down the second flow path 650e2 will preferentially flow down. It is configured as follows. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls win the second variable winning device 650, all the balls can be smoothly processed.

The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, the operation timing of the stopper 650c, and the operation timing of the V gate 650d will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25.

Next, the configuration of the first ball entry device 64 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 (a) to 5 (b) are views schematically showing the internal structure of the first ball entry device 64. In reality, a cover body is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is composed of a member whose inside can be seen through, and a spiral handle is colored on the surface so that the inside cannot be seen through or is difficult to see through. It is configured so that the inside is difficult to see.

A passage port through which the game ball can enter is provided in the upper part of the first ball entry device 64, and a transmissive ball entry sensor 64c that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage port is arranged. Has been done. The game ball that has passed through the passage port is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port A64b arranged below the game ball.

The distribution member 900 receives the entered game ball at the accommodating portion 900a or 900c of the distribution member 900. When the game ball is received by the accommodating portion 900a, the distribution member 900 rotates counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 5A) due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is first inserted into the ball. Guide to mouth 64a. Here, the distribution member 900 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees to the left and right, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c.

On the base body provided on the back side of the first ball entry device 64, the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 is arranged, and the base side magnet 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 and the base side magnet 901 are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) is generated at the tip end portion. The base side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the distribution member 900 side.

Like the base side magnet 901, the magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet, and is fixed to the distribution member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base side magnet 901 side. The base side magnet at the position where the distribution member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the accommodating portion 900a and the accommodating portion 900c comes directly above (on the center line of the interval at which the game ball of the passing port can enter about one ball). The position is such that the 901 and the magnet 900b of the distribution member 900 are closest to each other (the tips thereof face each other). Here, since the magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), the magnets may be repulsed and stopped at a position where the boundary wall of the distribution member 900 faces directly upward. It will be maintained at the position where it is rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is located on the center line (upper position) of the passage port, the distribution member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901, so that the distribution member 900 is left or right. The magnet rotates so that either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c faces the side (upper side of the gaming machine) that receives the game ball entering the first ball entry device 64. Therefore, by accepting the entered game ball in either the accommodating portion 900a or the accommodating portion 900c, the game ball is appropriately distributed to either the first entry port 64a or the second entry port A64b. be able to.

Further, when the magnet 900b and the base side magnet 901 repel each other, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 15 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first entry port 64a. It is possible to prevent the distribution member 900 from rotating clockwise (the accommodating portion 900a faces upward). As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first ball entry port 64a, the accommodating portion 900b is in a state of facing upward, and then the gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry device 64 is received by the accommodating unit 900b. Then, the distribution member 900 rotates about 30 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second entry port A64b. In this way, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the game ball entering the first ball entry device 64 to the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port A64b. Therefore, the game balls can be evenly distributed to the first ball opening 64a and the second ball opening A64b to win a prize, and a lottery game resulting from winning the first ball opening 64a, which will be described later (hereinafter, The first lottery game) and the lottery game resulting from winning the second ball opening A64b (hereinafter referred to as the second lottery game) can be efficiently executed.

The second ball entry port B640b provided in the second ball entry device 640 is a ball entry port in which the lottery of the second special symbol is started when the game ball enters, as in the case of the second ball entry port A64b. .. The second ball winning device 640 has an electric accessory 640a which is a variable means (see FIG. 2), and the ball is in an open state where it is easy to win a prize and a closed state where it is difficult to win a prize according to the operation of the electric accessory 640a. It is configured to be. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when a winning game is given by a lottery of ordinary symbols. In the second special symbol, the number of reserved balls is four, including the second entrance A64b and the second entrance B640b.

Further, only the game ball that has passed the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the passage port of the first ball entry device 64 (the size that one game ball can pass through), and the second entry Only the game ball that has passed on the right side can enter the ball mouth B640b.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64a (starting winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) with the ball as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The center frame 86 is provided with decorative movable accessories 400, 500, 600 that are movable in response to the variable display of the third symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81, the effect display during the winning game, and the like. Has been done. The decorative movable accessories 400, 500, 600 can provide a lively effect to the player by moving or emitting a built-in LED.

The decorative movable accessories 400, 500, and 600 are movable so as to cover the display area P (see FIG. 2) of the third symbol display device 81, respectively.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. The column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by adding a number from "0" to "9" on the handle.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned. Further, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the variable display is performed so that the plurality of main symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, "341").

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, all the numbers from "0" to "9" are given regardless of the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). There is a possibility that The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an effect similar to the interval effect (pseudo interval effect) performed during the round during the jackpot in a predetermined period (special fluctuation period) after the end of the jackpot. There is. In order to effectively perform this pseudo-interval effect, it is configured so that it is difficult to predict the jackpot type depending on the type of the main symbol displayed when the jackpot is hit. In addition, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, the chance eye composed of the "341" is displayed. In the present embodiment, the chance eye is one type of "341", but the chance eye is not limited to this, and may be composed of other loose eyes.

The variable display of the special symbol indicating the lottery result of the lottery game between the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not performed at the same time, but only one of them is performed. When the reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are stored, the variation of the special symbol is set in the order of winning. In the present embodiment, the hold storage of the first special symbol (maximum 4 pieces) and the hold storage of the second special symbol (maximum 4 pieces) are changed in the order of hold storage (winning order). However, other configurations may be used. For example, if the second special symbol is set to be preferentially changed and the second special symbol has a hold storage, the hold storage status of the first special symbol is available. Regardless, the second special symbol may be changed preferentially. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be changed and displayed at the same time.

In the present embodiment, the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11B, but the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol (special figure 1). The rate at which the small hit A, which is the small hit type, is selected is set high. Here, since the first ball entry device 64 alternately wins the first ball entry port 64a and the second ball entry port A64b, the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol alternates. Is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the winning from being biased toward one of the winning openings, prevent the player from becoming excessively damaged, and the damage on the player's side becomes excessive, or the damage to the player is excessive. It is configured so that problems such as extremely high performance can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to reduce the frequency of so-called over-winning, in which the number of reserved balls is exceeded by winning a prize biased to one of the winning openings, so that the ball enters the entry opening. In addition to reducing player dissatisfaction due to not winning a prize, the player stops ejecting balls every time the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit, and the turnover rate of the game deteriorates, so sales on the game store side do not increase. Can be prevented.

Further, when the time-saving game state is given, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in order to allow the ball to enter the second entry port B640b is performed, which is advantageous to the player. Since the game shifts to the special symbol variable game centered on the special symbol (special symbol 2), the time-saving gaming state can be provided as a more advantageous gaming state for the player.

Although a detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, the display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol. The lower side other than that is the sub-display area Ds for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like.

Three symbol sequences are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a predetermined order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers in each symbol row, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row. In particular, in the left symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row and the right symbol row, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as an effective line, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the order of the left symbol row → the right symbol row → the middle symbol row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is aligned on the effective line, the jackpot movie is displayed as a jackpot. Further, if the combination of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbol is "341") is aligned on the effective line, the small hit moving image is displayed as a small hit.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of types of small hits (small hit A to small hit C). Among these small hit types, there are small hits (for example, small hit A) and right, which are advantageous to the player by executing a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right area of the game board 13 during the small hit game. A small hit (for example, small hit C) is set so that the player does not have an advantage even if the hitting game is executed. In the above-mentioned small hit video, a guidance display that guides a game method that is advantageous to the player according to the small hit type (for example, a display that guides a right-handed game in the small hit video corresponding to the small hit A). It is included.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have been entered into the first entry opening 64a or the second entry openings 64b, 640b. This is the area to be displayed. Specifically, in the small area Ds1, a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is displayed in a manner in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished.

In the small area Ds2, the changing symbol, which is the same as the mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in the variable display, is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether the special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 by looking at the changing symbol. In addition, even when an effect that changes the mode of the reserved symbol (so-called hold notice effect) is adopted as an effect that suggests that the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol may be a big hit, the special symbol that is currently changing is used. It is possible to easily grasp the presence or absence of the hold notice effect.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the hold notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. The above-mentioned hold notice effect includes, for example, an effect of changing the color of the hold symbol (white → blue → red), an effect of changing the background effect of the hold symbol (suggested by the size of the flame), and a hold symbol. Any production that allows the player to determine the high or low possibility of a big hit, such as a production in which characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for a special symbol game in which a variable display is performed and a content for notifying the current game state are displayed. It should be noted that the guidance display of the game method during the small hit game displayed in the small hit moving image displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in any of the various display areas (Ds1 to Ds3) constituting the sub display area Ds. It may be displayed. By doing so, in the main display area Dm, a powerful production display corresponding to the small hit game and a decorative display congratulating the winning of the small hit game are executed, and in an area different from the main display area Dm. Since it is possible to execute a guidance display that guides the game method in a certain sub-display area Ds, the guidance display is obstructive and the production display is difficult to see, or the decorative display is too conspicuous and the guidance display is overlooked. It has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of defects.

In the present embodiment, the reserved sphere of the first special symbol and the reserved sphere of the second special symbol can be distinguished from each other, but the mode of the reserved symbol is the reserved sphere of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be in a mode that cannot be distinguished (difficult) from the reserved ball.

Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. It is transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction. On the other hand, the payout control device 111 is configured to be able to send and receive data in both directions.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is a switch composed of a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, sensors for detecting balls and detecting illegal games (solenoid sensor, radio wave sensor), and the like. 208, the door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 for driving the stopper 650c in the second variable winning device 650, and the inside of the second variable winning device 650. Various solenoids 209 including a V-gate solenoid 650d2 for driving the V-gate of the above and a specific door solenoid 65f2 for opening and closing the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 are connected, and the MPU 201 is input and output. Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via port 205.

Further, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, is connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 uses signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erase output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one prize ball at a time. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the amount of rotation of the payout motor 216 reaches a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100 pieces) of prize balls are paid out in a predetermined time (10 seconds) by the payout motor 216. Further, every time a predetermined number (100 pieces) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). As a result, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, for example, during a big hit, the payout motor 216 keeps paying out the prize balls without rest, and the payout motor 216 is prevented from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the operation of the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. The number of payouts and the payout suspension period until the payout of the prize balls is stopped by the payout motor 216 are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined within a range in which the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. it can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation pattern effect ( It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b), and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage to be used and the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the display (variation) of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 6). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting in the second symbol display device. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the above, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter C5 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 50). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, which are composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each area of, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, according to the timing of entering the first ball entrance 64a or the second entry ports 64b, 640b, And each value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 50).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entry ports 64b and 640b. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 of the RAM 203 is updated at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entry openings 64b and 640b.

Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol. If it is a random number that is out of order, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out of order.

On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there is one random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, and the random number value "0" is stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 10A). There is. As described above, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/400".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 10B). As shown in FIG. 10B, when the jackpot is a special symbol, the jackpot type when the random number value is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of missed special symbol (other than the big hit), a small hit is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. In the first hit random number counter C1, there are 398 random numbers that are small hits of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 398" are shown in the first hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 10 (a)). It is stored. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 398 while the total number of random numbers is 400 in this way, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "398/400".

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C4 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398, and the value of the small hit type counter C4 and the value of the small hit type counter C4 are provided in the ROM 202. The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 10C). In the present embodiment, this table is used as a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 for the first special symbol (special figure 1) and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 for the second special symbol (special figure 2). (See FIG. 10 (c)). Then, the range of random value values for which each small hit type is set is changed according to each table (see FIGS. 11A to 11B). This is because, as described above, the ratio of the small hit A, which is a small hit that is advantageous to the player, is selected in the second special symbol (special figure 2) rather than the first special symbol (special figure 1). is there. The contents of the small hit game according to each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11B.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. "Reach out of front and back" (for example, in the range of 98 to 99) and "Reach other than out of front and back" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. And three stop (effect) patterns of "complete deviation" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) in which reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a. It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the second entry ports 64b and 640b.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a normal game state and a time-saving game state, and the range of random value values set for each stop type is changed according to the table. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, or the like.

For example, in the time-saving game state, a table for high-probability time with a wide range of random values of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, and "complete" is selected. It becomes easier to select "off". In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and rear" and "reach other than the front and rear". Further, in the case of a normal game, the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is set in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64a or the second entry openings 64b, 640b. A table for low probability time as narrow as 0 to 79 is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely off". Further, in the normal game state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front / rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front / rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the normal game state, many reach displays with a long effect time can be performed, so that the ball entry time to the first entry opening 64a or the second entry openings 64b, 640b can be secured, and the third symbol display can be performed. The variation display by the device 81 is likely to be continuously performed. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98 to 99.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variable type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. Here, the fluctuation time refers to the time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started until the symbol is stopped and displayed and the symbol is confirmed. For example, if the symbol is stopped and displayed for 0.5 seconds after the symbol fluctuation of 9.5 seconds is executed and the symbol is confirmed, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (9.5 seconds + 0.5 seconds). Notated as. Based on this fluctuation time, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 50) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e (FIGS. 11 (c), 12 (a) to 12 (b)) stores a random value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. , See FIG. 13) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9A).

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 398, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 398), it returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 on either the left or right side. At that time, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table per normal symbol (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the normal symbol. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit set by the hit random number table, it is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol.

There are 200 random numbers that can be hit by ordinary symbols, and the range is "0 to 199". These random number values are usually stored in the random number table per symbol. As described above, the total number of random numbers in the normal symbol is 399, and the total number of random values that hit the normal symbol is 200. Therefore, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is approximately "1/2".

In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for 180 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 199", it is determined to be a hit, and after the fluctuation display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is lit and displayed. , The second entry port B640b is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance B640b is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits. , The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (time-saving medium), the probability of hitting the normal symbol is "1/2", which is the same as the normal game state, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Time is set to 1 second. In addition, an opening pattern is set so that the second entrance B640b is opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times" when a normal symbol is hit. As described above, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter into the second entry port B640b than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 398), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 50).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets a special symbol lottery and a variation pattern, and a normal symbol lottery and a variation pattern according to the value of the counter and the like. It is possible to carry out the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 50) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 49) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 9A, the ROM 202 varies from the first hit random number table 202a, the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the first small hit type selection table 202c, and the second hit random number table 202d. At least a pattern selection table 202e, a jackpot scenario table 202f, and a small hit scenario table 202g are provided.

As described above, the first hit random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the first random number table 202a, a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol is also set. The detailed contents of the first random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 10 (a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 10 (b).

The first small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter C5 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. The first small hit type selection table 202c has different data depending on whether the small hit is won by the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the small hit by the second special symbol (special figure 2). It is configured to determine the small hit type with reference to the table, and if a small hit is made in Special Figure 1, the type selection table 202c1 for Special Figure 1 is used, and if a small hit is made in Special Figure 2, Special Figure 2 is used. The usage type selection table 202c2 is referred to (see FIG. 10C). The detailed contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c will be described later with reference to FIG. 11 (a).

The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. For example, the value of the second hit random number counter C3 stored in the second hit random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 199. In the case of, it is judged to be a hit of a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits in the normal game state, the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the fluctuation display for the predetermined time (180 seconds) is completed, and the second entrance B640b The electric accessory 640a associated with the above is released only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during the time-saving), the value of the second hit random number counter C3 determined to be the hit of the normal symbol does not change, but the fluctuation time when it is determined to be the hit of the normal symbol is set to 1 second. After the variation display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port B640b is opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

The value of the second hit random number counter C3, which is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol, may be changed between the normal game state and the time-saving game state (during the time-saving).

The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11C, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is different from the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12A) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail determination result is a jackpot. Dedicated deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 12B) when the judgment result is out of order and in the normal gaming state, and small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 dedicated when the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. (See FIG. 13), each of which is configured at least.

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types are defined. Has been done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the jackpot scenario table 202f has a jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14B) dedicated to the case where the jackpot type is jackpot A, and the jackpot type is jackpot B. It is composed of a jackpot scenario b202f2 dedicated to the case (see FIG. 14C) and a jackpot scenario c (not shown) dedicated to the case where the jackpot type is jackpot C or D.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (see FIG. 9B), which counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small hit scenario table 202g is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, and is a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small hit types. Is stipulated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15A, the small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 (FIG. 15D) dedicated to the case where the small hit type is small hit A, and the small hit type is It is composed of a small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 15C) dedicated to the case of small hit B or C.

In this small hit scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q (see FIG. 9B), which counts when the small hit scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the door 650f is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the stopper 650c provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. Further, in the process of determining whether the passage of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a and the V discharge flow path 650e3 is normal, the range in which the passage of the ball is allowed is also based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q. It is stipulated.

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 9B. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 9B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. , Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203h, counter buffer 203i, variation execution flag 203j, variation order storage area 203k, and V flag 203m. It has an open counter 203n, a closing counter 203o, a jackpot scenario counter 203p, a small hit scenario counter 203q, a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r, a validity period measurement counter 203s, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entry port 64a (first special symbol), and has four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first jackpot type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the first small hit type counter C5 are stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol 1 is drawn in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 stored in the execution area after being shifted (moved) to the area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) whose area number is 1 smaller. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In this pachinko machine 10, as soon as a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a and each value of each counter C1 to C3 and C5 is acquired according to the starting winning, those values are included. The winning information command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 from the winning information command, and uses these as the winning information as the winning information of the RAM 233. It is stored in the storage area 223a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area dedicated to the second special symbol (second entry port A64b, second entry port B640b), and is relative to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. The only difference is that the first special symbol (first entry port 64a) is changed to the second special symbol (second entry opening A64b, second entry opening B640b). Omit.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. ) And. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the winning order is maintained and the data corresponding to the winning is stored. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, other The shift processing is performed to pack the winning data stored in the holding area of No. 1 into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64a. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the display device 81 (variation display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64a and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S704 in FIG. 40). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the special symbol 1 is newly executed (see S207 in FIG. 35).

In the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, the first special symbol (first entry ball opening 64a) is the second special symbol (second entry ball opening A64b, second) with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. The only difference is that it is changed to the 2 entry port B640b), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (holding number N2 of the variable display in the special symbol 2) is held. The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the ball number command (see S208 and S211 in FIG. 35, S705 in FIG. 40, and S808 in FIG. 41). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. Is.

The voice lamp control device 113 is mainly controlled by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls of the variable display held in the device 110 itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of reserved balls in the actual fluctuation display is deviated from the actual number of reserved balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the maximum number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is added up to 1 (see S1104 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1009 in FIG. 43).

When a ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1106 in FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c. (S1103: No in FIG. 44).

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving gaming state (time saving medium), and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203h is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving gaming state. If the value of the time-saving and medium-time counter 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is set to zero, and the main control device 110 sets a value according to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, 8 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit A", "big hit B", and "big hit D", and 0 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit C". After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h becomes 0 (S222 in FIG. 35).

When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, if the lottery result is a win, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a is 0. The opening pattern of .5 seconds x 2 times is set (S1017 in FIG. 43), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (S1018 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds as in the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is not a hit (S1017 in FIG. 43).

As described above, the counter buffer 203i is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The variation execution flag 203j is a flag indicating whether the first special symbol is changed or the second special symbol is changed. The fluctuation execution flag 203j sets the first special symbol if the reserved data stored in the first storage area of the variable order storage area 203k described later is the reserved data based on the first special symbol. If the data is on hold based on the special symbol, the second special symbol is set as the special symbol on which variable execution is performed. Note that this flag is an area that is backed up even when the power is cut off, and the first special symbol is set with priority in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared.

The variable order storage area 203k is an area for storing the winning order for each of the reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the variable order storage area 203k, and the order is stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. The storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

The V flag 203m is a flag for memorizing that a ball has passed through the passage detection switch 640e5, which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and is set to the value of the V flag 203m at the end of the small hit. Based on this, a jackpot is given. The V flag 203m is set as a big hit type based on the small hit type in the V passing process (S1306, S1309 in FIG. 46), is referred to in the small hit ending control process (S2107 in FIG. 54), and is then turned off. Is set to (S2108 in FIG. 54).

The open counter 203n is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and is turned on by the V gate solenoid 650e2 (moves the V gate 650d to the induction position). ), The count is started, and when the value of the counter of the open counter 203n exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned off (the V gate 650d is moved to the regulated position). In the V-gate drive control process, the open counter 203n is subjected to addition of counter values (S1404 in FIG. 47), determination of counter values (S1405 and S1406 in FIG. 47), and reset of counters (S1407 in FIG. 47). Will be done.

The closing counter 203o is a counter used for driving control of the V gate 650d, which is an induction member provided in the second variable winning device 650, and turns off the V gate solenoid 650e2 based on the counter value of the opening counter 203n described above. By doing so, counting is started, and when the value of the counter of the closing counter 203o exceeds a predetermined value, the V gate solenoid 650e2 is turned on (the V gate 650e is moved to the induction position). In the V-gate control process, the closed counter 203o performs addition of counter values (S1410 in FIG. 47), determination of counter values (S1411 in FIG. 47), and reset of counters (S1407 in FIG. 47).

The opening counter 203n and the closing counter 203o described above have a configuration in which a value is added by 1 in the timer interrupt processing in which the processing is executed every 2 milliseconds. Therefore, when the opening time of the V gate is 1.5 seconds, it is determined whether the value of the opening counter 203n exceeds 750, and when the closing time of the V gate 650d is 3.5 seconds, it is determined. It suffices to determine whether the value of the closure counter 203o exceeds 1750.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the values of various counter values are added by the timer interrupt processing is shown, but any configuration can be used as long as it can measure an accurate period. For example, it is timed by RTC (real-time clock). It may be measured using a certain period. Further, in the present embodiment, the opening counter 203n and the closing counter 203o have different configurations, but the opening period and the closing period may be measured by one counter.

The jackpot scenario counter 203p is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening / closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined, and based on the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot scenario counter 203p, the specific door 65f is used during the jackpot. Open control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203p is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process that there is a jackpot scenario setting (S1802 in FIG. 51), and in the jackpot ending control process, the control based on the jackpot scenario ends and the jackpot scenario Is reset after the setting of is cleared (S1905 in FIG. 52).

The small hit scenario counter 203q is a counter for updating the small hit scenario in which the operation timings of various devices (ball stop member 650c, door 650f) are defined, and the small hit scenario counter 203q is updated by the small hit scenario counter 203q. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small hit based on the hit scenario. The small hit scenario counter 203q is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the small hit scenario is set in the small hit control process (S2002 in FIG. 53), and the control based on the small hit scenario is performed in the small hit ending control process. Is finished, and after the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared, it is reset (S2111 in FIG. 54).

The special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is a flag for storing the period during which the winning of the second ball entrance B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid among the second special symbols (special figure 2). In addition to the period in which the special figure 2B valid period flag 203r is set to on (the period in which the winning of the second ball opening B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid), the second ball opening B (special figure 2B) It is used in the process of determining that the detection of winning a prize in 640b is an error (S803 in FIG. 41).

This special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to ON from the start of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640 until the validity period measurement counter 203s, which will be described later, measures a predetermined period. The flag. The special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to on in the normal symbol variation processing (S1025 in FIG. 43), and is set to off in the normal symbol variation processing after a predetermined period has elapsed (S1004 in FIG. 43).

The validity period measurement counter 203s is for measuring the period during which the above-mentioned special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to be on (the period during which the winning of the second entry port B (special figure 2B) 640b is valid). It is a counter, and while the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is subtracted (from the time 1000 is set as the counter value to the time when the value of the counter is subtracted to 0), the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to on.

The validity period measurement counter 203s is set to ON (S1026 in FIG. 43) in the normal symbol variation processing, and 1000 is set as the counter value. Then, 1 is subtracted by the normal symbol variation process executed every 2 milliseconds as the timer interrupt process (S1002 in FIG. 43), and the process is repeated until the counter value becomes 0 (until 2 seconds have elapsed).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, details of various tables included in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described.

First, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 10A. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the first hit random number table 202a, the value "0" of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the jackpot determination value, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the small hit determination value. The value "399" of the first random number counter C1 is set as the determination value of "1 to 398" other than the big hit and the small hit (off).

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of "1/400", a small hit with a probability of "398/400", and a loss with a probability of "1/400". The lottery result of the special symbol is almost a small hit.

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 10B. FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value "0 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the determination value of the jackpot A, and "50 to 99" is set as the determination value of the jackpot B. "Is set. For the jackpot C and the jackpot D, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is not set. It is a jackpot type set by passing through the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot game is started, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of prize balls are obtained by inserting the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a. The game is executed. In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 2 rounds (2R) is started, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game state (time saving) is given 8 times. When the jackpot B is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 5 rounds (5R) is started, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game state (time saving) is given eight times.

When the jackpot C is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 10 rounds (10R) is started, but the time saving game state (time saving) is not given after the end of the jackpot game. When the jackpot D is selected, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 10 rounds (10R) is started, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game state (time saving) is given eight times.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, by winning the jackpot (big hit A or jackpot B) of the special symbol, the game always shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is completed, but the round of the jackpot game The number is set to be less than jackpot C or jackpot D. This is because the jackpot (big hit C or jackpot D) executed by the game ball adding a specific area during the small hit game can make the player think that he / she has won the jackpot by himself / herself. This is because the privilege by C or the jackpot D is made more advantageous for the player.

FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c. As shown in FIG. 10 (c), in the first small hit type selection table 202c, a special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 and a special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 are set, and the small hit type selection table 202c according to the special figure 1 is set. The selection ratio of the small hit type is changed between the hit and the small hit according to Special Figure 2. Here, the type selection table 202c1 for special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11A.

FIG. 11A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 202c1 for special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11A, when it is a small hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is a small hit when the random number value is "0 to 34" in the small hit type counter C5. The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "35-40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "41-398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a). First, when "small hit A" is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the game ball easily wins the second variable winning device 650. An opening scenario for opening for .5 seconds is set, and "big hit D" is set as a jackpot type given when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when passing through V). When "small hit B" is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 0. An opening scenario is set in which the operation of opening for 1 second is performed three times, and "big hit D" is given as a jackpot type given when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when passing through V). Is set. Also, when "small hit C" is selected, the same opening scenario as "small hit D" is set, and when passing through a specific area provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (when passing V). ) Is set as the jackpot type.

In this way, the small hit game that opens the second variable winning device 650 by differentiating the opening pattern of the door (attacker) 650f during the small hit game and the big hit type given when passing V, depending on each small hit type. It is possible to set a small hit that is advantageous to the player and a small hit that is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to provide various playability.

Next, the type selection table 202c2 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 11B. FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 202c2 for special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the case of the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small hit when the random number value is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5. The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "91-398", the small hit type is "small hit C".

In this embodiment, the winning ratio of each special symbol (first special symbol (special figure 1) and second special symbol (special figure 2)) is made different according to the game state (normal game state or time-saving game state). It is configured in. Specifically, since the game aiming at the first ball entry device 64 is performed in the normal game state, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are won. Although the ratio is set to 1: 1 in the time-saving game state, since the game aiming at the second ball entry device 640 (right-handed game) is performed, the special figure 1 is not won.

Therefore, as described above, by changing the selection ratio of the selected small hit type in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to provide a game advantageous to the player according to the game state. Further, as will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous (easy to pass V) state to the player by having continuous “small hits A”. In a normal gaming state in which and special figure 2 are alternately won, the expectation that "small hit A" will be won consecutively depending on whether the next prize that wins "small hit A" is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Since the degree changes, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of continuously winning the "small hit A", which has the effect of improving the interest.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (c). FIG. 11C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 11C, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e includes the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 12A) and the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (see FIG. 12B). ) And the variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small hits (see FIG. 13) are set at least.

First, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 12A. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table in which the display mode (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined, and the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends and the current number of fluctuations Various jackpot fluctuation patterns are selected based on the number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of the time saving game state (time saving), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot indicates how many times the lottery of the special symbol for which the variation pattern is selected this time is the lottery after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery of the special symbol of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot game. When selecting the fluctuation pattern indicating the result, the number of fluctuations "1" after the end of the jackpot is referred to, and the number of fluctuations "2" after the end of the jackpot is selected otherwise. In this way, by setting a variation pattern that differs only at a specific variation timing in the variation pattern selection of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a variation pattern that appears only at the specific variation timing. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where you get tired of the contents of.

Here, although details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the first rotation after the end of the big hit is "small hit A", a special effect is executed if a predetermined condition is satisfied. (See FIGS. 32 to 33). Therefore, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e is defined so that the display mode of the variation pattern different from the other cases is selected only in the first rotation after the jackpot is completed.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10, when the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (7) at the timing of selecting the fluctuation pattern, V is discharged in the small hit game if the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is configured to provide a situation in which it is easy to pass through a specific region provided in the flow path 650e3. Therefore, the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 202e is set so that the display mode (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved balls.

Returning to FIG. 12A, the description will be continued. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1, time-saving variation A to time-saving variation D are set as variation patterns selected for the time-saving gaming state (with time-saving), and jackpot variation A to jackpot variation A to the variation pattern selected for the normal gaming state. C is set. First, the time saving variation A to the time saving variation D selected in the time saving game state will be described. The time saving fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98" is 20 seconds when the number of fluctuations is 1 after the jackpot ends and the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2. Is. The time saving fluctuation B is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “99 to 198” in the same state as the time saving fluctuation A is 30 seconds.

The time saving fluctuation C and the time saving fluctuation D are the time saving fluctuation C (variation) when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 98" in the gaming state other than the gaming state in which the time saving fluctuation A or the time saving fluctuation B is set. When the time (time 4 seconds) is "99 to 198", the time reduction variation D (variation time 6.5 seconds) is set respectively.

Next, the jackpot fluctuations A to C selected in the normal gaming state will be described. In the normal gaming state, the variation pattern is set only by the value of the variation type counter CS1 regardless of the gaming state (the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the number of reserved balls). The jackpot fluctuation A is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 98” is 5 seconds, and the jackpot fluctuation B is a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “99 to 149”. Is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 25 seconds set in the case of "", and the jackpot fluctuation C is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds set when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "150 to 198". is there.

Next, the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 202e2. Similar to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table described above, the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 also has the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends, the current number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of the time saving game state (time saving), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Since various deviation patterns for deviation are selected based on the above, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the jackpot variation pattern is different, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small hits will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e3 for small hits. Similar to the selection of the jackpot fluctuation pattern described above, the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 also includes the number of fluctuations after the jackpot ends, the current number of reserved balls, the presence / absence of the time saving game state (time saving), and the variation type counter CS1. Fluctuation patterns for various small hits are selected based on the value of.

In the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3, the special variation A is obtained when the number of fluctuations is one after the big hit is completed and the time saving game state (time saving) is reached, and the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit A. Moreover, the special fluctuations B to C are selected when the number of fluctuations is 2 or more and the number of reserved balls is 5 to 7 after the end of the jackpot.

Here, the special variation A will be described. The special variation A is a special variation selected when the continuous jackpot effect (see FIGS. 31 to 34) described later is executed. In the special variation A, a specific variation time (30 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot in order to execute the continuous jackpot effect.

A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33, but the continuous jackpot effect is a small hit when the small hit A is won in the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot. The timing at which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the hit A game and the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 is in the guided state are calculated in advance, and after the big hit is completed. It is determined whether the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol of the first rotation is started, that is, the timing at which the jackpot game ends is the timing at which the small hit A game of the first rotation can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 after the jackpot ends. Then, based on the determination result, the effect during the jackpot game (the effect during the final round and the ending period) is determined.

Next, the special variation B will be described. The special variation B is a special variation selected when executing the small hit continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later. This is because when the small hit A is continuously executed as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the special variation B is selected as each variation pattern when the small hit A is continuously executed. This is a variation pattern for setting the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A game to open is different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d.

Here, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set when the special fluctuation B is selected will be described. In the present embodiment, the special variation B is selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit A and the number of reserved balls at the time of selecting the variation pattern is 5 or 6. This special fluctuation B is defined as a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 5.5 seconds. A detailed explanation will be given with reference to FIG. 27. When the small hit A is continuously won and the special variation B is selected, the execution timing of the continuous small hit A is set to the V gate 650d. The small hit A is executed at a timing different from the execution cycle of (in the present embodiment, the timing is different by 1.5 seconds).

In this way, in the next special symbol lottery in which the small hit A is won, if the small hit A is won in a state where the predetermined conditions (the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6) are satisfied, the small hit A is continuously won. (If you win), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is defined so that the small hit A is executed at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. It is possible to facilitate the execution of the small hit A at the timing when the ball can be passed through the V gate 650d in the state (it becomes easy to execute the advantageous small hit game).

Next, the special variation C will be described. The special variation C is a special variation selected when executing the small hit continuous effect (FIGS. 27 to 30) described later, and when the small hit A is continuous, the first small hit game is executed. It is a fluctuation pattern for making the timing constant.

The small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 has the same number of fluctuations after the big hit and the current number of reserved balls as in the above-mentioned jackpot variation pattern selection table, except that the above-mentioned special variations A to C are provided. The variation pattern for various small hits is selected based on the presence / absence of the time-saving game state (time reduction) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected for the jackpot variation pattern is different. Since only the differences are made, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the various fluctuation pattern tables described above, various fluctuation patterns (variation time) are selected according to the game state (number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot, number of reserved balls, presence / absence of time reduction) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is better to store a large number of reserved balls to detect a big hit via a small hit game, that is, a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 (passage detection in the V discharge flow path 650e3). Since it is configured to be able to increase the expectation of passing through the switch 650e5), it is configured to select a long fluctuation time (for example, 60 seconds) as an opportunity to store a plurality of reserved balls.

Next, the jackpot scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario table 202f. The jackpot scenario table 202f is defined so that jackpot scenarios corresponding to the jackpot types selected by the first jackpot type selection table 202b can be selected, and the jackpot game is executed based on the selected jackpot scenario.

The jackpot scenario table 202f has a jackpot scenario a202f1 dedicated to jackpot A, a jackpot scenario b202f2 dedicated to jackpot B, and a jackpot scenario c202f3 dedicated to jackpot C or D as the jackpot scenarios to be selected.

Next, the jackpot scenario a202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario a202f1. When the jackpot scenario is set, the jackpot scenario counter 203p starts counting (S1802 in FIG. 51), and various controls set corresponding to the counter values of the jackpot scenario counter 203p are executed. The counter value is added in the main process of the main control device 110 executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the value of the counter value is added by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the jackpot scenario a is set and the counter value reaches 1250 (5 seconds have passed), the jackpot opening period ends, and when the counter value is updated to 1251, the specific door 65f of the first variable ball entry device 65 is opened. The specific door solenoid 65a2 is set to ON (start one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 8750 (35 seconds have passed), that is, 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened, the specific door solenoid 65a2 is set to off in order to close the specific door 65f (end of one round). ..

The closing condition (end condition) of the specific door 65f in one round of this pachinko machine is when 30 seconds have passed since the specific door 65f was opened and when 10 balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. is there. Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win in the specific winning opening 65a within 30 seconds after the specific door 65f is opened, the value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to 8749 (1 at the end of one round). It is configured to execute the process of updating up to (previous).

With this configuration, the counter value is subsequently added by 1, and the counter value becomes 8750, and the operation control for closing the specific door 65f is executed. Therefore, the door closing control is executed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. It is possible to reduce the processing load, and it is possible to prevent a problem in the operation control of the specific door solenoid when the conditions for ending each round occur at substantially the same timing.

After that, until the counter value reaches 9250, that is, until 2 seconds have passed since the end of the first round, the specific door 65f is maintained in the closed state as the inter-round interval period, and the counter value becomes 9251. Then, the operation control is executed to start the next round, and the specific door solenoid is set to be on to open the specific door 65f (second round). When the counter value reaches 16750, the specific door solenoid is set to off as in the first round (end of the second round).

Since this jackpot scenario a202f1 is a jackpot scenario corresponding to jackpot A, which is a jackpot for two rounds, when the second round ends, the jackpot ending period until the counter value reaches 18,000 (until 5 seconds have passed from the end of the second round). Is executed. As described above, the jackpot A in which the jackpot scenario a is set is provided with a jackpot game that is executed until the counter value reaches 18000 (72 seconds) at the longest.

Next, the jackpot scenario b202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (c). FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot scenario b202f2. This jackpot scenario b202f2 is a jackpot scenario in which the jackpot type is set for jackpot B (5 round jackpot), and the description is omitted because the number of rounds executed is different from the jackpot scenario a202f1 described above. To do.

In the present embodiment, only the operation control of the specific door 65f is shown as the control executed based on the jackpot scenario, but other controls may be executed based on the jackpot scenario. For example, a period obtained by adding a predetermined time to the period in which the specific door 65f is opened is set as the winning validity period for the first specific winning opening 65a, and it is determined whether or not the ball winning in the first specific winning opening 65a is normal. You may be able to do it.

Next, the small hit scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 202g. In this small hit scenario table 202g, small hit scenarios corresponding to the small hit types selected by the first small hit type selection table 202c are stored so as to be selectable, and small hits are stored based on the selected small hit scenario. The game is executed.

The small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 dedicated to small hit A and a small hit scenario b202g2 dedicated to small hit B or C as selected small hit scenarios.

Next, the small hit scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 15B. FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a202g1. When the small hit scenario is set, the small hit scenario counter 203q starts counting (S2002 in FIG. 53), and various controls set corresponding to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q are executed. The counter value is added in the main process of the main control device 110 executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the value of the counter value is added by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small hit scenario a is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started and the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to be turned on in order to project the stopper 650c to the ball stop position. Then, when the counter value reaches 625 (2.5 seconds have passed from the start of the small hit), the opening period of the small hit ends, and when the counter value reaches 626, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. Set the door solenoid 650f2 on (start of round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have passed), that is, 1.5 seconds after the door 650f is opened, the door solenoid 650f2 is set to off in order to close the door 650f (end of round).

Then, when the counter value reaches 1001, the ending period of the small hit is started. During the ending period of this small hit, when the counter value reaches 1125, that is, 0.5 seconds have passed since the door 650f was closed, the ball stop solenoid was used to retract the stopper 650c to the ball stop release position. 650c2 is set to off. This discharges the balls (excluding the balls staying at the ball stop position) staying in the second variable winning device 650 with the door 650f closed to the outside of the second variable winning device 650. The small hit scenario is configured so that the door solenoid 650f2 is set to off and then the stopper ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to off 0.5 seconds later in order to provide a grace time (0.5 seconds). It is a thing.

With this configuration, when the stopper 650c is released, it is possible to prevent a ball other than the ball staying at the ball stop position from flowing down toward the V gate 650d, and an unexpected game ( There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game in which a plurality of balls flow down toward the V gate) being executed in one small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 15B, the description will be continued. When the counter value reaches 1250, that is, 0.5 seconds after the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to off, the ball passes through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 (V passage). A period (counter value 1250 to 1500) for validating what has been done is set. The period from when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to off until the V passage is enabled is from when the ball staying at the ball stop position releases the stopper 650c until it passes through a specific area. The shortest time (0.5 seconds) required for is set. Therefore, it is possible to effectively handle the ball staying in the stopper 650c passing through the specific area, and invalidate the ball passing through the specific area even during the small hit game except for the period during which the V passage is valid. Therefore, for example, there is an effect that the ball is intentionally retained in the second variable winning device 650 to prevent an illegal game in which the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1500, the ending period of the small hit ends, the valid period of passing through V ends, and the small hit game ends. In the small hit scenario a202g1, the door passable period is set between the counter values 626 and 1125 as the period for validating the winning of the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. By setting the validity period in this way, it becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the winning or passing of the ball is normal.

Next, the small hit scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (c). FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b202g2. The small hit scenario b202g2 is a small hit scenario corresponding to the small hit B or the small hit C, and it is difficult for the ball to win the second variable winning device 650 by opening and closing the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 at high speed. This is a scenario that provides a small hit game.

Since the opening period during the small hit game is set to be 1 second shorter than that of the small hit scenario a202g1, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, since the ending period during the small hit game is the same as that of the small hit scenario a202g1, the description thereof will be omitted. The scenario contents of the round period during the small hit game will be described below.

When the small hit game is started and the counter value reaches 376, the door solenoid 650f2 is set to turn on to open the door 650f, and then when the counter value reaches 401, the door solenoid 650f2 is turned off to close the door 650f. Set. That is, in the small hit scenario 202g2, one opening time of the door 650f is set to 0.1 seconds. This opening operation is repeated three times, and when the counter value reaches 901, the round ends.

In this way, in the small hit scenario b, the opening time of one door 650f is set to 0.1 seconds, which is a time when it is difficult for the ball to enter. Further, the total opening time (0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds × 3 times)) at which the door 650f is opened in the small hit scenario b becomes the door 650f opening time (1.5 seconds) in the small hit scenario a. On the other hand, since the time is set to one-fifth, the ball provides a small hit game in which it is difficult to win the second variable winning device 650.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a game specification storage area 222b, a V-gate scenario 222c, a precursor effect selection table 222d, a continuous effect type selection table 222e, and a continuous effect variation pattern selection. At least the table 222f, the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222 g, the small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h, and the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i are stored. The fluctuation pattern table 222a will be briefly described because it is already known, but based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is shown. Further detailed fluctuation contents are determined from the type (reach, deviation, etc.). Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined.

The game specification storage area 222b is an area in which various specifications set in the main control device 110 are stored, and is at least a jackpot stored in the various variation pattern selection tables 202e and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Information on the scenario table 202f and the small hit scenario table 202g is stored.

The information stored in the game specification storage area 222b may be referred to when acquiring the door opening timing based on the next or next variation in the V passable variation determination process (S3702, S3703 in FIG. 70), or a jackpot. In the start process, it is referred to when acquiring the door opening timing in the small hit game of the first rotation after the end of the big hit game (S2804 in FIG. 61).

The V-gate scenario 222c is a scenario in which the operation timing of the V-gate 650d, which is driven and controlled by the main controller 110, that is, the timing for setting the V-gate solenoid 650d to be on and the timing for setting it to be off are set. In the V-gate command reception process, the V-gate scenario 222c is set (S2506 in FIG. 58), and the operation timing of the V-gate 650d is grasped on the voice lamp control device 222 side based on the counter value of the V counter 223t described later. Used for It is also used to determine whether the V-gate state command received from the 110 side of the main controller matches the content of the V-gate scenario 222c corresponding to the counter value of the V counter 223t (S2504 in FIG. 58). ..

The precursor effect selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect content of the precursor effect to be executed based on the number of holds and the value of the effect counter 223 g when the precursor effect counter 223p, which will be described later, is 3 or more. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 17 (c). The precursor effect selection table 222d is referred to when selecting the precursor effect in the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Here, the precursor effect is a state in which the reserved memory in which the result of the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit A is continuously fluctuated and displayed in the reserved memory of the special symbol (hereinafter, the small hit A continuous executable state). It is an effect that is executed when it is stored in (referred to as), and when the variable display is executed, the player is notified to set the number of reserved special symbols to a predetermined number or more (for example, 8). It is a production to perform.

The continuous effect type selection table 222e is a table that defines the types of continuous effects to be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 18A, but in the continuous effect type selection table 222e, the number of times the continuous effect is executed (2 or 3 times in this embodiment) and the V-passable variation are different. The continuous production type is selected based on the execution order (this time, next time, or one after another). The continuous effect type selection table 222e is referred to when selecting a continuous effect type in the continuous effect type selection process (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612, S3613 in FIG. 69).

Here, the continuous effect means that the number of reserved special symbols is a predetermined number or more (7 or more) when the variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A in the small hit A continuous execution state is selected. It is an effect executed in the case, and is executed as an effect associating the variable display corresponding to the continuous small hit A and the display during the small hit game.

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is a table that defines variation patterns corresponding to each variation during continuous effect. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 (b). The continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68).

The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222 g is a table that defines variation patterns corresponding to each variation when a new prize (additional prize) occurs during the continuous effect. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 18 (c). The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222 g is referred to when selecting the variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 in FIG. 68).

The small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h is a table that defines the effect display contents executed during the small hit game. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 (a). The small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h is referred to when selecting a small hit effect pattern in the small hit start effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64).

The precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that defines whether or not to execute the SW effect as the precursor effect when the condition for executing the precursor effect is satisfied. A detailed description will be described later with reference to FIG. 19 (b). The precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i is referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3401 in FIG. 67).

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (b). FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, and a fluctuation start flag 223e. , Stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number accumulation counter 223h, V gate initial flag 223i, V gate state storage area 223j, open timing storage area 223k, and V passable variable storage area 223m. , Specific small hit continuous counter 223n, small hit continuous number storage area 223o, precursor effect counter 223p, continuation flag 223q, end information storage area 223r, continuous jackpot effect flag 223s, V counter 223t, and so on. At least the effecting flag 223u, the continuous effecting counter 223v, the continuous effect type selected flag 223w, the additional winning flag 223x, the SW effective time 1 counter 223y, and the SW effective time 2 counter 223α are provided.

The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and eight areas (first area to eighth area), and each of these areas has counters C1 to C3 and C5, which are prize information. Each value of is stored. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, the first random number counter C1, the first jackpot type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit are acquired according to the start prize. From each value of the type counter C5, various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the information is predicted (estimated). Various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 8th) among the vacant areas of the 8 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. ), Which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64a, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the hold ball number command. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (S2410 in FIG. 57). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the hold ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 hold ball number after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the hold ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball for the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the numerical symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. Since it differs only in that it is performed, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol with respect to the above-mentioned special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. Since it differs only in, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223e is set to on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2402 in FIG. 57), and in the variation display setting process, the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. Is set to off when is done (S3202 in FIG. 65). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S2302 in FIG. 56) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S2405 in FIG. 57), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S3208 in FIG. 65). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop type is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for advance notice effect and various lottery. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, the sound lamp control device 113 is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 is executed (S2312 in FIG. 56).

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter that counts the number of rounds during the jackpot game. Every time a round number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, 1 is added (S2704 in FIG. 60), and the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect processing (S2906 in FIG. 62). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708 in FIG. 60), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h indicates the final round of the jackpot game. When the value is reached, the final round command for display is set (S2707 in FIG. 60), so that the effect based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ..

The V-gate initial flag 223i is a flag used for grasping the opening timing of the V-gate on the voice lamp control device 113 side, is set to ON in the start-up process (S2212 in FIG. 55), and is a V-gate command reception process. In, the V-gate scenario 222c is set and then turned off (S2507 in FIG. 58). This V-gate initial flag 223i synchronizes the operating state of the V-gate based on the V-gate state command received from the main controller 110 with the scenario content of the V-gate scenario 222c by updating the counter value of the V counter 223t, which will be described later. It is set to on only after the power is turned on.

With this configuration, among the V-gate status commands transmitted from the main controller 110 every 4 milliseconds, the V-gate status command indicating the first release after the power is turned on (S1403 in FIG. 47). ) As a reference, the V-gate scenario 222c can be set. Further, by setting the V-gate scenario 222c on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to predict the timing at which the V-gate opens in the future.

The V-gate state storage area 223j is an area for storing V-gate state information (information indicating whether the V-gate is in the open state or the closed state) based on the V-gate state command received from the main control device 110. This V-gate state storage area 223j stores V-gate state information in the V-gate command reception process (S2501 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining whether or not it matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (FIG. 58). 58 S2504).

The opening timing storage area 223k is an area for storing the V gate opening timing at which the V gate calculated based on the set V gate scenario 222c is opened. This open timing storage area 223k stores the V gate open timing in the V gate command reception process (S2508 in FIG. 58), and is referred to when determining the V passable variation in the V passable variation determination process (S2508 in FIG. 58). S3704 in FIG. 70).

The V-passable variation storage area 223m is an area for storing the variation determined to be V-passable in the V-passable variation determination process. The V-passable variation storage area 223m stores whether the variation determined to be V-passable in the V-passable variation determination process is the current variation, the next variation, or the next variation (Fig.). 70 S3706, S3708, S3709), and the stored information is referred to in the continuous effect type selection process (S3605, S3609, S3611 in FIG. 69), and in the small hit start effect process, the value of the continuous effect counter 223v described later. Is cleared when is 0 (S3109 in FIG. 64).

The specific small hit continuous counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive times when a winning command including winning information indicating that the result of the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit A is received from the main control device 110. The specific small hit continuous counter 223n is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the winning command including the winning information indicating that the winning command is A is received in the winning command receiving process (S2610 in FIG. 59), and the winning command is received. It is referred to when it is determined in the process that a winning command including winning information indicating other than the small hit A has been received (S2605 in FIG. 59), and then reset to 0 (2608 in FIG. 59).

In this pachinko machine 10, when the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n becomes 2 or more, that is, when the winning command is received so that the small hit A is continuously executed, the small hit A can be continuously executed. It is in a state.

In the small hit continuous number storage area 223o, when it is determined that the winning command including the winning information indicating other than the small hit A has been received in the winning command receiving process, the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n described above is a predetermined number ( In the present embodiment, it is an area for temporarily storing the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n when the value is 2) or more. The value temporarily stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o is set in the continuous production type counter 223v in the continuous production type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69), and then the stored value is cleared (S3601 in FIG. 69). S3602 in FIG. 69).

The small hit continuous number storage area 223o stores the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n, which is added based on the winning command received from the main control device 110, until the timing of selecting the fluctuation pattern based on the winning command. Storage area.

The precursor effect counter 223p is a counter in which the current number of reserved balls is set when the small hit A continuous execution is possible. When the value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is determined to be 2 in the winning command reception process, the precursor effect counter 223p is set with the current number of reserved balls (S2612 in FIG. 59), and the precursor fluctuation pattern. It is subtracted in the selection process (S3405 in FIG. 67).

Then, it is referred to in the fluctuation pattern selection process (S3302 in FIG. 66), and when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is determined to be 0 in the small hit start effect process, it is reset to 0 (S3108 in FIG. 64). .. When the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than a predetermined value (2 in the present embodiment), the precursor effect can be executed.

The continuation flag 223q is a flag set to be turned on in order to execute the continuous jackpot effect executed during the jackpot game. The continuation flag 223q is a result of a small hit game in the V-passable variation when the variation determined to be the V-passable variation in the V-passable variation process is not the final variation in which the continuous effect is set. When the jackpot game is executed and the fluctuation of the first special symbol started after the end of the jackpot game becomes the fluctuation in which the small hit A is won (S3608 in FIG. 69), the jackpot start effect is set. In the process, the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to on and then turned off (S2811 in FIG. 61).

By setting the continuation flag 223q to ON, the continuous jackpot effect is executed in the final round of the jackpot game.

In the end information storage area 223r, when the result of the fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big hit is the small hit A, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small hit game and the V stored in the V gate opening timing storage area 223k. Based on the gate opening timing, this is a storage area for storing the jackpot end timing (the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game) in which the small hit game of the first rotation after the jackpot ends becomes a small hit game that can pass V.

The end information storage area 223r stores the jackpot end timing calculated when it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON in the jackpot start effect processing (S2809 in FIG. 61), and the jackpot end effect processing. (S2903 in FIG. 62) and then cleared (S2907 in FIG. 62).

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether the end timing of the final round in the jackpot game matches the end timing stored in the end information storage area 223r, and if they do not match, the display jackpot failure ending command is matched. Sets the jackpot success ending command for display.

The continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is a flag set to be turned on in order to make the effect of the final round in the jackpot game a continuous jackpot effect. This continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to on after the final round end timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r in the jackpot start effect process (S2810 in FIG. 61), and is referred to in the jackpot end effect process (FIG. 62). S2901), the display ending command based on the end timing of the final round is set and then turned off (S2905 in FIG. 62).

The V counter 223t is a counter for updating the V gate scenario 222c. In the V counter update process, the V counter 223t is incremented by 1 when the value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (when it is smaller than 5000) (S3903 in FIG. 72), and when the value of the V counter 223t is 5000. , The value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904 in FIG. 72).

The V counter 223t is configured so that its value is set to 1 when the count is updated up to 5000. This is because the control content based on the scenario defined in the V-gate scenario 222c is the content of repeatedly executing the control for 5 seconds, so that the value of the V counter 223t is also the same for 5 seconds (counter value 5000). After counting, it was configured to be set to 1 again. With this configuration, the area for storing the value of the V counter 223t can be reduced.

The continuous production flag 223u is a flag set to be turned on during the continuous production. This continuous effect in-progress flag 223u is set to on when the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 2 and the number of reserved balls is larger than 6 in the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3408 in FIG. 67), and a small hit starts. It is referred to when selecting an effect pattern in the effect process (S3101 in FIG. 64), and is set to off when the counter 223v during continuous effect, which will be described later, becomes 0 (S3106 in FIG. 64).

Here, the continuous effect means that the number of reserved memories is larger than a predetermined number when selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the first reserved memory among the reserved memories in the small hit A continuous execution state (in the present embodiment). This is an effect that is executed when (more than 6), and is an effect that is continuously executed by associating a plurality of variable display effects and an effect during a small hit game. The detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30.

The continuous production counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of times the continuous production is executed (remaining number of times). In the continuous effect type selection process, the value stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o is set in the continuous effect counter 223v (S3601 in FIG. 69), and 1 is subtracted in the small hit start effect process (FIG. FIG. 64 S3104). It is also referred to when selecting a variation pattern in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3504 and S3505 in FIG. 68). The subtraction in the small hit start effect processing is executed until the counter value becomes 0.

Based on the value of the counter 223v during the continuous production, the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table 222f and the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table (additional prize) are identified by identifying the number of times the fluctuation for which the fluctuation pattern is selected this time is the continuous production. At 222g, an appropriate variation pattern is selected.

The continuous effect type selected flag 223w is a flag set to be turned on so that the continuous effect type is not reset. This continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to on when the continuous effect type is selected in the continuous effect type selection process (S3614 in FIG. 69), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3501 in FIG. 68). , In the small hit start effect processing, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is determined to be 0, it is set to off (S3110 in FIG. 64).

The additional winning flag 223x is a flag that is set to be turned on when a new winning (additional winning) occurs while the continuous production is being executed. This additional winning flag 223x is set to on when the continuous effecting flag 223u is set to on in the winning command receiving process (S2603 in FIG. 59), and is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (FIG. FIG. 68 S3503). Then, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 in the small hit start effect process, it is set to off (3107 in FIG. 64).

This additional winning flag 223x is used for processing that assumes the next fluctuation or the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the next fluctuation executed when the fluctuation pattern is selected when the continuous production is started because the additional prize is generated during the continuous production execution. It is shown that the number of reserved balls used and the number of reserved balls used when actually selecting the fluctuation pattern (variation time) to be executed are different, and a fluctuation pattern different from the previously assumed fluctuation pattern is selected. It is a thing.

Therefore, when an additional prize is generated during continuous production execution and the additional prize flag 223x is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is added to the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table (addition). Winning) It will be selected from 222g.

The SW effective time 1 counter 223y is a counter that counts the time during which the operation of the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a or frame right button 22b) is enabled during the SW effect. The SW effective time 1 counter 223y counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIGS. 28 to 29) executed during the continuous effect, and a predetermined time is set in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (FIG. FIG. 29). 68 3506), it is subtracted by the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3802 in FIG. 71), and the counter value is reset to 0 when the frame button 22 is operated (S3805 in FIG. 71).

The SW effective time 2 counter 223α is a counter that counts the time during which the operation of the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a or frame right button 22b) is enabled during the SW effect. The SW effective time 2 counter 223α counts the effective time of the SW effect (see FIG. 26) executed in the precursor effect, and when the variation pattern having the SW effect is selected in the precursor variation pattern selection process. Is set to a value of 5000 (corresponding to 5 seconds), and is subtracted by the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S3807 in FIG. 71). Then, when the frame button 22 is operated, the value of the counter is reset to 0 (S3810 in FIG. 71).

In this way, by setting the SW effective time in advance in each SW effect, for example, the frame button is displayed only while the display for guiding the operation of the frame button 22 is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the operation of 22 can be enabled, the player unintentionally operates the frame button 22, and as a result, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 becomes the operation of the frame button 22. It is possible to eliminate the situation of switching based on the above, and it is possible to improve the quality of the SW effect in the gaming machine.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, various tables and the like included in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. First, the game specification storage area 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 17A. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the game specification storage area 222b. Various game specifications (game information) set by the main control device 110 are stored in the game specification storage area 222b, and at least small hit scenario information and fluctuation pattern information are stored as information used by the voice lamp control device 113. Is remembered. In the small hit scenario information, the time of each small hit scenario, the opening timing and the opening period of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit A and the small hits B to C are stored as information, respectively, and the fluctuation pattern information. As information, each variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection table 202e and its variation time are stored as information. In addition, information based on selection conditions and jackpot scenarios when special variations A to C are selected is also stored (not shown).

By storing various game specifications stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 on the voice lamp control device 113 side in this way, the voice is based on the winning command and the number of reserved balls command received from the main control device 110. It is possible to assume a future game timing on the lamp control device 113 side. For example, by the winning command reception process, the winning commands including the winning information in which the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit are continuously received, and when the variation pattern is selected based on the first winning information, the number of reserved balls is 7. Then, as the fluctuation pattern based on the first winning information, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Then, if a winning command based on a new winning (additional winning) does not come by the time the next fluctuation starts, the lottery result is a small hit A and the number of reserved balls at the time of selecting the fluctuation pattern is the next fluctuation. Since the number is 6, it can be assumed that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation B (variation time 5.5 seconds) is transmitted from the main control device 110.

In addition, since the game specification storage area 222b also stores information indicating the timing and opening period when the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened during the small hit game, this variation is a special variation B (variation). After the lapse of time (4 seconds), the small hit game of the small hit A is executed, and it becomes possible to grasp that the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small hit game is started.

Furthermore, since it is assumed that the special fluctuation B will be executed for the next fluctuation, if the jackpot game is not executed by the small hit A game due to this fluctuation, it will be special as the next fluctuation after the end of this small hit game. Fluctuation B (variation time 5.5 seconds) is executed, then the small hit game of small hit A is executed, and the door 650f is opened for 2.5 to 4 seconds after the small hit game is started. It becomes possible to grasp.

That is, at the stage of selecting the current fluctuation pattern, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened 6.5 seconds to 8 seconds and 16 seconds to 18.5 seconds after the start of the current fluctuation. Can be assumed.

Further, by comparing with the opening timing information of the V gate stored in the opening timing storage area 223k described above, the opening timing of the door 650f based on the current fluctuation and the opening timing of the door 650f based on the next fluctuation can be determined. It is also possible to determine whether or not the opening timing at which V can pass is reached, and it is also possible to display a pre-effect based on the determination result on the third symbol display device. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of advance effects rather than advance notification based only on the winning command, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game specification storage area 222b of the present embodiment stores only the game specifications referred to in the control of the voice lamp control device 113 to reduce the storage capacity, but is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. All the information stored may be stored in the game specification storage area 222b. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the work of separately creating data for the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the V-gate scenario 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (b). FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c. In this V-gate scenario 222c, the V-counter 223t is incremented by 1 each time the V-counter update process (see FIG. 53) executed in the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, which is updated every 1 millisecond, is executed. It is a scenario updated by the counter value of, and a scenario corresponding to the count value 1 to 5000 of the V counter 223t is set.

The scenario content of the V gate scenario 222c represents a state in which the V gate 650d is open until the counter value of the V counter 223t becomes 1 to 1500 (1.5 seconds), and the counter value becomes 1501 to 5000. It represents a state in which the V gate 650d is closed until it becomes (3.5 seconds).

Then, when the counter value reaches 5000, the process of setting the counter value to 1 again and updating the counter value is performed (S3904 in FIG. 72). Since the voice lamp control device 113 has this V-gate scenario 222c, the state of the V-gate 650d (whether it is open or closed) can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the future opening timing is assumed. It becomes possible.

Further, since it is possible to compare the V-gate state command received from the main control device 110 with the update status of the V-gate scenario 222c, it is possible to detect at an early stage that a problem has occurred in the operation control of the V-gate 650d. Is possible. The actual operating status of the V-gate 650d may be detected by using a sensor or the like, and the actual operating status may be compared with the updated status of the V-gate scenario 222c. With such a configuration, there is an effect that an illegal signal is output to the V opening solenoid 650d2 and an illegal act such as illegally operating the V gate 650d can be detected at an early stage.

Next, the precursor effect selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (c). FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the precursor effect selection table 222d. The precursor selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect content of the precursor effect to be executed based on the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) and the value of the effect counter 223 g when the precursor effect counter 223p is 3 or more. It is referred to when selecting a precursor effect in the pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

Specifically, when the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 3 to 4, that is, when the order in which the fluctuations based on the hold memory to be continuously produced are executed is close, and when the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 5 to 5. In the case of 8, that is, the content selected in the precursor effect changes depending on the case where the variation based on the hold memory that is the target of the continuous effect is executed in a distant order. For example, when the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 3 to 4 and the number of holds is 7, the number of holds of special symbols is equal to or more than a predetermined number at the timing when the fluctuation based on the hold memory that is the target of continuous effect is executed. Therefore, a production that gives the player expectations (for example, a big chance!) Is selected.

On the other hand, when the value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 5 to 8 and the number of holds is 0 to 3, there is a time until the fluctuation based on the hold memory which is the target of the continuous effect is executed, so the hold ball. An effect that suggests increasing the number (for example, full power launch!) Is selected.

In the present embodiment, it is set as a condition for executing the continuous effect that the small hit A is continuously won and the number of pending numbers is a predetermined number or more (7 or more) when the fluctuation is executed. In the above-mentioned precursor effect, in a situation where the reserved memory won in the small hit A is continuously stored, the number of reserved numbers is equal to or more than a predetermined number (7) by the time the variable display based on the reserved memory is executed. It is a production that makes suggestions to make it (more than one).

With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player to memorize the reserved number up to a predetermined number or more, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the precursor effect is changed based on the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p and the number of pending effects. In addition to this, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The display mode of the precursor effect may be changed. For example, when the fluctuation time is long, since it is a chance to acquire a plurality of reserved memories, it is preferable to display the content indicating that fact. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the launch of the game ball while the fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is being executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the precursor effect can be executed only in the state where the hold memory won by the small hit A is continuously stored, but the hold memory won by the small hit A is not continuously stored. Even in the case, the precursor effect may be configured to be feasible. With this configuration, even if the hold memory that won the small hit A is not continuously stored, the player who sees the effect display by the precursor effect tries to store the hold number up to the upper limit value. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

Next, the continuous effect type selection table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 18A. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect type selection table 222e. In this continuous effect type selection table 222e, the value of the counter 223v during continuous effect (2 or 3 in this embodiment) and the order of fluctuations determined to be V passable by the V passability determination process (in this embodiment, this time). , Next time, or one after another), and the type of continuous production is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the continuous effect type in which 2 continuous effects (continuous effect executed over 2 fluctuations) is executed is selected, and the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is selected. When is 3, the continuous effect type in which 3 continuous effects (continuous effects executed over 3 fluctuations) are executed is selected.

Further, when the order of fluctuations that can be passed through V is this time, the type of 2 continuous production A or 3 continuous production A is, in the next case, the type of 2 continuous production B or 3 continuous production B is, and in the case of the next time. 3 The type of continuous effect C is selected. When the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2, the target of continuous production is 2 fluctuations, so that the 3rd fluctuation (sequential times) is not selected.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the value of the continuous production counter 223v is set to 3, but the upper limit of the value of the continuous production counter 223v is not limited to this, for example, the upper limit of the value of the continuous production counter 223v can be stored as the number of reserved balls. It may be set in the range up to the upper limit (8 in this embodiment). By doing so, it is possible to prolong the period during which the continuous production is executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f. This continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f is referred to in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3505 in FIG. 68), and is in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 and the continuous effect type selection process. Fluctuation pattern based on the selected continuous effect type (S3606, S3607, S3610, S3612 in FIG. 69) and the value set in the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v in the continuous effect type selection process (S3601 in FIG. 69). Is selected.

As the effect display mode of the variation pattern selected here, a chance effect (see (b) and (c) of FIG. 28), which is an effect indicating that a small hit that can pass through V is executed in the next and subsequent fluctuations. , This fluctuation is a super chance effect (see (a) and (b) of FIG. 29), which is an effect indicating that a small hit that can pass V is executed, and after the small hit that can pass V is executed. There are three types of throbbing effects (see (c) in FIG. 29), which are effects executed by fluctuations.

Further, based on the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v, a variation pattern in which different variation times corresponding to each chance effect are set is selected. Specifically, in a state where two continuous effects A are selected as the continuous effect type, if the value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2, the super chance effect A with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected as the variation pattern. To.

This is because when two continuous effects A are selected as the continuous effect type and the value of the counter 223v during continuous effects is 2, the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit A and the number of reserved balls is 7. This is because the fluctuation pattern is set in the case of the above state, so that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation C (variation time 4 seconds) is set.

The above-mentioned pounding effect means that the big hit game is not executed after the end of the small hit game that can pass through V, that is, the second variable winning device 650 wins a ball in the small hit game that can pass through V. This is an effect corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol executed after the small hit game that can pass V is completed when the ball does not pass through the specific area during the small hit game. In this throbbing effect, an effect that does not suggest the degree of expectation of whether or not the small hit game based on the fluctuation of the corresponding special symbol can pass through V is executed.

If a new prize (additional prize) occurs during the continuous production, it is assumed by the fluctuation pattern (variation time) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command actually received from the main control device 110 and the V-passable fluctuation determination process. There is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) will be different, and the judgment result of whether or not V can pass will not be the correct judgment result. Therefore, when an additional prize is generated, the fluctuation pattern is selected by using a dedicated fluctuation pattern selection table (continuous effect fluctuation pattern selection table (additional prize) 222 g).

Next, with reference to FIG. 18 (c), the variation pattern selection when an additional prize is generated will be described. FIG. 18C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of 222 g of the continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional prize). The continuous effect variation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g is a table that is referred to when an additional winning occurs, and the pounding effect is executed based on the variation pattern (variation time) received from the main controller 110. It is configured as. With this configuration, even if an additional prize is generated and the fluctuation pattern selected by the main control device 110 differs from the fluctuation pattern assumed by the voice lamp control device 113, the main control device 110 The effect corresponding to the content of the received variation pattern command can be executed by the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the production content of the continuous effect is changed when the additional prize is generated, but when the additional prize is generated, the V-passable fluctuation determination process is executed again. A process of correcting the effect content of the continuous effect may be performed based on the determination result. With such a configuration, when the big hit game can be executed via the small hit game, it becomes easy to execute the continuous effect, and there is an effect that the effect expected by the player can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (special variation B) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit A and the number of reserved balls is 5 to 6, and the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit. The fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation C) selected when the number of reserved balls is 7 is different from that of A, but even if the same fluctuation pattern is selected and an additional prize is generated. The determination result of the V-passable variation determination process may not be affected. For example, even when the number of reserved balls is 7, the special variation B may be set to be selected.

With this configuration, even if an additional prize is generated during the continuous production, the judgment result of the V-passable fluctuation judgment process calculated in advance and the result of the game actually performed will not be different. It has the effect of being able to provide an appropriate production.

Next, the small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. FIG. 19A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h. Here, the small hit medium effect pattern selection table 222h is a table for selecting the effect content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game, and is an additional prize in the small hit game by the small hit A. Select the effect pattern (small hit effect pattern) during the small hit game according to the presence or absence of the flag 223x or the flag 223u during continuous production, and whether or not the small hit game this time is a small hit that can pass V (V is possible). Is stipulated.

Next, the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i will be described with reference to FIG. 19B. FIG. 19B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i. The precursor effect variation pattern selection table 222i is a table that is referred to when it is determined that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than 2, and the variation pattern command and the effect counter received from the main control device 110. Based on the value of 223 g, a variation pattern in which the SW effect (precursor effect) is performed or a variation pattern in which the SW effect is not performed is selected.

When the fluctuation pattern type received from the main control device 110 is less than or equal to a predetermined time (5000 milliseconds), it is impossible (difficult) to execute the SW effect during the fluctuation, so based on the value of the effect counter 223 g. The fluctuation pattern in which the presence or absence of the SW effect is selected is predetermined only for the fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time (5000 milliseconds).

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 24. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display fluctuation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches the instruction code, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to suppress the processing by the MPU 231 and the generation of various images by the image controller 237.

Further, since the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the bad data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different bad data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other. The processes of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made available in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (S4001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (FIG. 75 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 73).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. It is displayed alternately and repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64a, the fluctuating image at power-on The image controller 237 is displayed from the MPU 231 so that the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the area 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64a while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 21, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 21B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 21, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 initially positions the display area between the first position a and the position a'of the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further, the display area is displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 21A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d are recorded. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

On the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 20) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning opening 64, the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, and thereby writes the image for one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time saving period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the ball will pass through the second entrance B640b, so that the lottery of the normal symbol will be held more often, and there will be more chances of winning the normal symbol. Become. Therefore, since there are many chances that the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance B640b, and the lottery of the special symbol can be easily performed. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first entry port 64a is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, the electric accessory is opened as a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball receives the second prize. The easier it is to enter the mouth 640, the more prize balls. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls held is difficult to decrease or the number of balls held is not reduced even when the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit with a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can perform the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased, the player can continue to have the motivation to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and a character used for various effects such as a boy image and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backs A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. Also, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (FIG. 24) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. Is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data meaning is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, in the example of FIG. 23). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. To do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", the address "0002H" in the transfer data table defines the Bull data, so it is determined that there is no image data to be transferred to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 73) (S4005 in FIG. 73). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the transfer setting process, It is set to off (S6405 in FIG. 88 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S4301 in FIG. 75 (b)), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 75) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S4309 in (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The process (FIGS. 76 to 85) and the display setting process (FIG. 86) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S6301 in FIG. 88 (a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 88 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is set for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 24), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (FIG. 24) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing the image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. To do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S4303 in FIG. 86). ), The pointer update process (S6005 in FIG. 86) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing according to the filter specification information by the method specified by that information. After that, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other image contents to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image and the warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the timekeeping counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007 in FIG. 86). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S1902 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 89) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S6513 in FIG. 89). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (S6514 in FIG. 89). The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is referred to as a frame buffer (hereinafter, "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S6602 in FIG. 90).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and displays the image with the drive signal for the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, the display process of displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 75 (b)) is executed, it is performed (S6603 of FIG. 90).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, from the time the ball passes through the entry port (first entry port 64a, the second entry opening A64b or the second entry port B640b) until the jackpot game is executed. The flow of the game will be explained. FIG. 25A is a timing chart showing the flow in which the big hit game is executed via the small hit game. FIG. 25A shows a pattern in which the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit type A, and the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

First, based on the ball entering the ball entry port (first entry port 64a, second entry port A64b or second entry port B640b), the main control device 110 changes the special symbol (special). Along with the execution of the figure variation), the display control device 114 executes the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 via the voice lamp control device 113 (for example, the variation time). 10 seconds).

Further, the V gate solenoid (V open solenoid) 650d2 that operates the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 to the open state or the closed state is constantly turned on and off at a constant timing after the power is turned on. It is controlled by the main control device 110 so as to be used. Here, the V gate solenoid (V open solenoid) 650d2 is set to the induction position (the position where the V gate 650d is opened so that the ball can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) by being set to ON. By positioning and setting it to off, the V gate is configured to be positioned at the regulated position (the position where the V gate 650d is closed so as to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3).

This V-gate solenoid (V-open solenoid) 650d2 positions the V-gate 650d in the induction position for a period t5 (1.5 seconds) after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, and then a period t6 (3.5 seconds). ), That is, an operation cycle in which the V gate 650d is positioned at the regulated position, that is, the period from the position of the V gate 650d at either the induction position or the regulated position to the next position at the regulated position is one operation cycle. The operation cycle is controlled to be repeatedly executed.

As a result of the above-mentioned special symbol variation, when the symbol (identification information) indicating the small hit A is stopped, the small hit A game is subsequently executed, and the display control device 114 displays the effect of the small hit A on the third symbol display device 81. Will be done. The control contents of various devices executed during the small hit game are determined based on the small hit scenario selected with reference to the small hit scenario table 202g stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit A, when the small hit game is executed, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to be on for the period t4 (4.5 seconds). Then, when the period t1 (2.5 seconds) elapses from the start of the small hit game, the door solenoid (opening solenoid) 650f2 for opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is turned on for the period t2 (1.5 seconds). Set.

At this timing, the second variable winning device 650 is in a state where the ball can be won, and the first winning ball pushes down the flow path switching member 650b and stays by the stopper 650c. Then, the subsequent winning ball rolls on the upper surface of the flow path switching member 650b that has returned to the initial position, flows down the first flow path 650e1, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

After the period t2 (the period during which the door solenoid (open solenoid) 650f2 is set to be on) elapses, the door solenoid (open solenoid) 650f2 is set to off during the period t3 (2 seconds), and the second variable winning device 650 is set. Make the ball impossible (difficult) to win. Further, at the timing when the period t4 elapses, that is, at the timing when 0.5 seconds elapse after the period t2 ends, the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to off, and the stopper 650c is released from the ball stop position to the ball stop release position (release). Move to position).

The time (0.5 seconds) provided from when the door solenoid 650f2 is set to off until when the ball stop solenoid 650c2 is set to off is the time (0.5 seconds) for the ball staying in the second variable winning device 650. 2 The variable winning device 650 is set as a grace period for discharging to the outside.

When the stopper 650c moves to the release position, the ball staying at the ball stop position (the first ball that enters) flows down toward the V gate 650d, and the flow timing is such that the V gate 650d is in an guided state. At the timing of (induction position), the sphere passes through the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 (described as V detection SW in FIG. 25) provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3, while the V gate 650d is regulated. At the timing of the state (regulated position), the V gate 650d rolls on the upper surface, flows down the second flow path, and passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e4 (see FIG. 4).

Then, when the passage detection switch (specific area) 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3 detects the ball (by passing the ball through the specific area), the big hit game is performed by the main control device 110 after the small hit game is completed. The specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened after a predetermined period of time has passed since the jackpot game was executed, and the display control device 114 displays the jackpot effect on the third symbol display device 81. ..

As described above, by operating various devices (door 650f and stopper 650c) at predetermined timings during the small hit game, it is possible to allow only one ball to flow down toward the V gate at a predetermined timing. , The proper game can be surely executed. In addition, since the operation control of various devices is executed based on one small hit scenario, there is less risk of an error in the operation control timing between the devices than when the operation control is performed independently for each device. , It is possible to execute a proper game more surely.

Further, by using the above-described configuration, the timing at which the ball flows down on the V gate 650d after the start of the small hit game is set to be constant (in the present embodiment, about 5 seconds after the start of the small hit game). However, since the operation of the V gate 650d is constantly controlled at a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is randomized whether or not the ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game passes through a specific area. be able to.

Further, by configuring the operation timing of the V gate 650d so that it can be grasped by the voice lamp control device 113, it is possible to determine whether the small hit game this time is a small hit game that can pass through V.

FIG. 25B is a timing chart showing a flow in which a jackpot game is executed based on a lottery of special symbols. First, based on the ball entering the ball entry port (first entry port 64a, second entry port A64b or second entry port B640b), the main control device 110 changes the special symbol (special). The figure variation) is executed, and the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113.

Then, when the special symbol variation is completed and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed by the main control device 110, and the first variable winning device 65 is elapsed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game. When the specific door 65f of the above is opened, the display control device 114 displays the effect of a big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

The time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25 (a) to the execution of the jackpot game and the time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25 (b) to the execution of the jackpot game are It is advisable to set the fluctuation time of each special figure variation or the game time of the small hit game so that they are the same. With this configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the player won the big hit in the special symbol lottery or whether the big hit was given as a result of the small hit game, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp whether the big hit was given to the player, and the third symbol display device 81. There is an effect that the production displayed in can be enjoyed to the end.

Further, when the above-described configuration is adopted, the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged at the lower center of the game board 13. By doing so, it is not necessary to notify the location where the game ball is to be launched (so-called right-handed display) by the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit game, and the player can receive a special symbol. It is possible to make it difficult to know whether a big hit was won in a lottery or whether a big hit was given as a result of a small hit game.

Further, the time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25 (a) to the execution of the jackpot game and the time from the start of the special figure change shown in FIG. 25 (b) to the execution of the jackpot game are set. The same effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it more difficult for the player to know whether the big hit was won by the lottery of the special symbol or whether the big hit was given as a result of the small hit game.

Further, even when the V-passable small hit is executed, if the ball cannot be won by the second variable winning device 650, the big hit is not given. Therefore, for example, in the third symbol display device 81. Among the displayed effect displays, the third symbol display device 81 is used until the V-passing process for determining whether the ball has passed through the specific region in the V discharge flow path 650e3 during the small hit game is executed. When the effect display to be executed is the same and it is determined that the sphere has passed through the specific area in the V discharge flow path 650e3 as a result of the determination of the V-passing process, the same effect display is continuously executed and the V is performed. Only when it is determined that the sphere has not passed through the specific area in the discharge flow path 650e3, it is preferable to execute the process of switching the content of the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result.

With this configuration, in the normal game flow in which the ball is passed through a specific area during the execution of the V-passable small hit and the big hit is executed after the small hit game is completed, the third symbol display device is used. Since it is not necessary to switch the content of the effect display displayed in 81, there is an effect that the processing load of the effect display can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, among the display modes displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10, the precursory effect will be described. 26 (a) to 26 (b) are views showing an example of the display mode of the precursor effect. The precursor effect is an effect executed when the reserved balls whose special symbol lottery result is a small hit A are continuously stored in the stored reserved balls, and the special symbol is produced. This is an effect for encouraging the player to accumulate the reserved symbols up to the upper limit by the time the fluctuation based on the reserved ball whose lottery result is the small hit A is executed.

Here, the display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. The display screen (P) of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, the upper side is the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the other lower side is the sub-display for displaying the number of reserved balls and the like. It is the area Ds.

Three symbol sequences are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a predetermined order. The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three display areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is a reserved ball whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls that have entered each entry port (first entry port 64a, second entry opening A64b or second entry port B640b). A pending symbol indicating the number of is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the special figure 1 and the reserved symbol of the special figure 2 are displayed in an indistinguishable (difficult) manner, but the reserved symbol of the special figure 1 and the reserved symbol of the special figure 2 are displayed. The display mode of the reserved symbol may be changed so that the player can identify. Further, another display body (mark) capable of distinguishing the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be displayed in the vicinity of the reserved symbol without changing the display mode of the reserved symbol. By doing so, the player can easily grasp whether the next fluctuation is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2.

In the small area Ds2, the changing symbol, which is the same as the mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol being displayed in the variable display, is displayed. With this configuration, even when an effect that changes the mode of the reserved symbol (so-called pending notice effect) is adopted as an effect that suggests that the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol may be a big hit, it is currently present. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not there is a hold notice effect for a special symbol that is changing.

Therefore, it is possible to easily associate the hold notice effect performed in advance with the variable display of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player is interested in the effect. The above-mentioned hold notice effect includes, for example, an effect of changing the color of the hold symbol (white → blue → red), an effect of changing the background effect of the hold symbol (suggested by the size of the flame), and a hold symbol. Any production that allows the player to determine the high or low possibility of a big hit, such as a production in which characters appear on the screen.

In the small area Ds3, a game explanation (“explanation indicating pressing a button”) for a special symbol game in which a variable display is performed and a content for notifying the current game state are displayed.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 26 (a). In FIG. 26 (a), six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1, and the reserved symbol in which the result of the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit A (in FIG. 26 (a)). (Shown as a star pattern) is continuously stored.

In this state, that is, in the state where the reserved balls whose special symbol lottery result is the small hit A are continuously stored in the reserved balls, the precursor effect can be executed, and the game is played in the small area Ds3. A content prompting the person to operate the frame button 22 is displayed.

Here, when the player operates the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. 26B, the characters “a little more !!” are displayed in the small area Ds3. This character is selected with reference to the precursor effect selection table 222d in the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3403 in FIG. 67).

In the example shown in FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (b), the reserved symbols corresponding to the reserved balls whose special symbol lottery result is a small hit A are indicated by stars for ease of explanation. , Actually, it is displayed as a reserved symbol in a display mode that cannot be distinguished (difficult) from other reserved symbols. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance which reserved symbol the precursor effect is being executed, and when the precursor effect is executed, the number of reserved balls should always be accumulated up to the upper limit. The game will be played enthusiastically, and the operation of the game machine can be increased.

Further, the mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the small area Ds1 may be changed to a display mode suggesting that the reserved balls that have won the small hit A are continuously stored. In this case, the display mode of the two consecutive reserved symbols may be changed to suggest that the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed may have won the small hit A, or one of the reserved symbols may be reserved. The display mode of the symbol is changed, and in addition to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed, either the reserved symbol that changes before the reserved symbol or the reserved symbol that changes after that has won the small hit A. It may be configured to suggest that it is a reserved symbol corresponding to a sphere.

With this configuration, the player enthusiastically plays the game to accumulate the reserved balls up to the upper limit before the change based on the specific reserved symbol (the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed) is started. If you succeed in accumulating the reserved balls up to the upper limit at the timing when the fluctuation based on a specific reserved symbol starts, you can see the fluctuation effect based on the reserved symbol with a sense of superiority. effective.

It should be noted that this precursor effect is configured to be feasible up to the fluctuation before the fluctuation based on the reserved ball in which the lottery result of the special symbol is the small hit A is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 to 30, a continuous effect will be described among the display modes displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 27 is a timing chart showing the flow of continuous production and the operation control of various devices.

Here, the continuous production will be described. The continuous effect is a reserved ball when the lottery result of the special symbol is continuously small hit A and the variation pattern corresponding to the first small hit A is selected from the continuous small hit A. Is an effect executed when a predetermined number (7 in this embodiment) is stored, and in the continuous small hit A game, in the V discharge flow path 650e3 provided in the second variable winning device 650. This is an effect for highlighting a small hit A game (hereinafter, V passable small hit) in which a ball can pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5).

This continuous effect is at least the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the first small hit A among the continuous small hits A (hereinafter referred to as the first special figure variation display) and the first special symbol variation display. The small hit A game executed as a result (hereinafter referred to as the first small hit A game) and the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit A among the continuous small hits A (hereinafter, the second time). (Referred to as the special figure variation display) and the small hit A game (hereinafter referred to as the second small hit A game) executed as a result of the second special figure variation display. ..

As shown in FIG. 27, when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, the main control device 110 selects the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) for the first special figure variation, and the special variation C (variation time 4 seconds) is selected. After the fluctuation of C is stopped, the first small hit A game is executed (6 seconds). Then, as the second special figure variation, the special variation B (variation time 5.5 seconds) is executed, and after the variation of the special variation B is stopped, the second small hit A game is executed.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, based on various commands set by the main control device 110, the special figure fluctuation display corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation and the first small hit A game are supported. The small hit medium display 1, the special figure variation display 2 corresponding to the second special figure change 2, and the small hit medium display 2 corresponding to the second small hit A game are displayed.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to an inductive state (a state in which a ball can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as its operation, and then in a regulated state (V discharge) for 3.5 seconds. The operation of changing the ball to the flow path 650e3 so that it cannot pass through (difficult) is set as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

Here, in the state where the continuous effect is executed, the winning ball V gate arrival timing (see FIG. 27), which is the timing at which the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 in the first small hit A game reaches the V gate 650d. ), The interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small hit A game is 11.5 seconds.

This is the time from the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate to the end of the small hit A game (1 second) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation (5.5 seconds) in the first small hit A game. Of the second small hit A game, this is the total time (5 seconds) from the execution of the small hit game to the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate.

By setting the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in this way, it is possible to let the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d whose operation is controlled in a cycle of 5 seconds.

Explaining in detail, since one cycle of the V gate 650d is set to 5 seconds, the operating state is the same as the operating state of the V gate 650d corresponding to the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game. However, from the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game, it comes 5 seconds later, 10 seconds later, and every 5 seconds. In the present embodiment, the interval between the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the first small hit A game and the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the second small hit A game is 11.5 seconds, so that the second small hit The timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the hit A game is 1.5 seconds later (different) than the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game.

Here, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate, which can provide a more advantageous gaming state to the player when the small hit A is continuously won, will be described. In the present embodiment, the period during which the V gate 650d is in the guided state is set to 1.5 seconds. That is, when the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings differ by less than 1.5 seconds (for example, 0.5 seconds) from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the first and second winning balls are won. There is a high possibility that the V gate 650d is in the regulated state (3.5 seconds) at both ball V gate arrival timings.

On the contrary, when the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings differ from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by more than 1.5 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), the V gate 650d is in the guided state. There is a possibility that it will span a period.

Therefore, by setting the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings to differ from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) during which the V gate 650d is in the guided state. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the V gate 650d is in the regulated state at both the first and second winning ball V gate arrival timings without straddling the period in which the V gate 650d is in the guided state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the V gate 650d is changed to the induction state (a state in which the ball can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds, and then 3.5 seconds. During that time, an operation that changes to a regulated state (a state in which the ball cannot pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 (difficult)) is set as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed. That is, the V gate 650d is configured to be in the guided state for 1.5 seconds with an interval of 3.5 seconds. In other words, the V-gate 650d is configured to be in a regulated state for 3.5 seconds with an interval of 1.5 seconds.

Further, in the small hit A game, the game time of the small hit game is set to 6 seconds, and the ball moves to the V gate 650d at the timing when about 5.5 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started. Designed to reach.

Therefore, in the case where the hold memory in which the result of the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit A is continuously fluctuated and displayed in the hold memory of the special symbol (small hit A continuous execution state), it is stored. Of the consecutive small hits A, the second special is from the timing when the winning ball reaches the V gate 650d during the first small hit game (the timing when 5.5 seconds have passed since the small hit game was started). If the time until the winning ball reaches the V gate 650d during the second small hit game through the variable display is an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, the continuous small hit A In any of the small hit games based on the above, the ball will reach the V gate 650d at the timing when the V gate 650d is performing the same operation.

That is, if the total time of the game time of the small hit A game and the fluctuation time of the special symbol is an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the V gate 650d operating in the predetermined operation cycle The ball will flow down at the same timing. In such a configuration, even if the player wins the small hit A in succession, there is no merit for the player, and the motivation for playing is reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game time (6 seconds) of the small hit game (small hit A game) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure variation display (special variation B) among the continuous small hits A. : 5.5 seconds) is configured so that the total time (11.5 seconds) does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As a result, when small hit games occur continuously, the continuous small hit games do not cause the ball to flow down the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle at the same timing. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game in succession, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when the small hit game is won alone, and the player wins the small hit in succession. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease in motivation for playing.

In the present embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation C: 5.5 seconds) of the continuous small hit A. The total time (11.5 seconds) is different from the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d by the period (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induction state. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is set.

This is set in order to increase the probability that the ball will flow down to the V gate at the timing when the V gate 650d is in the guided state in any of the small hit games in the continuous small hit game. That is, in the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the time to be in the guided state is 1.5 seconds, and the time to be in the regulated state is 3.5 seconds. If the total time of the hit A with the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the latter is less than 1.5 seconds with respect to the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, the former (first time). ) And the latter (second) small hit game may be a small hit game that can pass V. In this way, the fact that the small hit games that can pass V in continuous small hit games overlap means that neither the former (first) small hit game nor the latter (second) small hit game can pass V (difficult). ) This is because the possibility of becoming a small hit game increases accordingly.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game time of the small hit A game (6 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display (special fluctuation B: 5.5 seconds) of the continuous small hit A Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol so that the total time (11.5 seconds) differs by 1.5 seconds from the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d, and make continuous small hits. Of the games, when the timing of causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game is the regulation state of the V gate 650d, the ball is made to flow down to the V gate 650d in the second small hit game. The timing can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the guided state, and when the player wins the small hit game continuously, the game is more advantageous than the case where the player wins the small hit game alone. It is possible to provide a state, and there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing due to consecutive winning of small hits can be suppressed.

The time for the difference is preferably 1.5 seconds or more with respect to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. For example, when the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (5 seconds) is different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by a time shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second), the number of consecutive small hits is set. It is preferable that the number of times is more than 2 times (for example, 5 times) and the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is different by one lap (5 seconds).

With this configuration, for example, when the small hit game is consecutive five times, the small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once among the consecutively executed small hit games. There is an effect that when a player wins a small hit game in succession, he / she can be provided with a more advantageous gaming state than when he / she wins a small hit game alone.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle. By doing so, for example, when the number of consecutive small hits is made larger than 2 times (for example, 5 times) and the total operation cycle of the V gate 650d is different by one lap or more (7.5 seconds). In the first cycle and the second cycle, the timing at which the ball flows down to the V gate 650d can be made different in the small hit game. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the continuous small hit A game is set to a specific interval by setting the variation time of the special symbol to a specific variation time. In addition to that, for example, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the first small hit A game and the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the second small hit A game may be different. Further, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d may be changed based on the continuation of the small hit A game. Even with this configuration, it is possible to set the interval of the winning ball V gate arrival timing in the continuous small hit A game to a specific interval as in the present embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30, the continuous effect display displayed by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 28 (a) is an example showing the first half of the special figure variation display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first special symbol variation in which the continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 28 (b) is the special figure variation. An example showing the latter half of the display 1 (see FIG. 27), FIG. 28 (c) shows the first half of the small hit medium display 1 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the first small hit A game in which the continuous effect is executed. This is an example showing.

FIG. 29 (a) is an example showing the first half of the special figure change display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second special symbol change in which the continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 29 (b) shows the special figure change. It is an example showing the latter half of the display 2 (see FIG. 27), and FIG. 29 (c) is another example showing the latter half of the special figure variation display 2 (see FIG. 27).

FIG. 30A is an example showing the first half of the small hit medium display 2 (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the second small hit A game in which the continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 30B is a small hit. This is an example showing the latter half of the middle display 2 (see FIG. 27).

First, in FIG. 28A, the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the continuous effect is executed is shown. When the continuous effect is started, the variation display of the third symbol is executed in the variation display area Dm1 provided on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and the vacant area (of the main display area Dm) of the main display area Dm is executed. An aspect (corresponding to the chance effect of FIG. 18B) indicating that the continuous effect has started in the variable display area (area other than Dm1) is displayed.

In the small area Ds1, seven reserved symbols are displayed, and the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A in the leftmost reserved symbol (reserved symbol corresponding to the next fluctuation) (second time). The reserved symbol corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation) is displayed (star symbol), and the changing symbol is displayed in the small area Ds2 (star symbol). For convenience of explanation, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved ball whose lottery result is a small hit A is displayed as a star symbol, but in reality, it is displayed in a display mode that cannot be distinguished from other reserved symbols (difficult). It is displayed.

After that, in the latter half of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the first special figure change, a display indicating that both the frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b are pressed is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the frame left button is displayed. A guidance display indicating the location of the 22a and the frame right button 22b is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. Further, in the small area Ds3, an aspect indicating that continuous production is in progress (corresponding to the chance production of FIG. 18B) is displayed (see FIG. 28B).

The frame left button 22a and the frame right button 22b provided on the pachinko machine 10 are arranged at intervals (500 mm) that are difficult to operate with one hand, and when operating both buttons, an operation handle is used. You need to take your hand off 51. This is because when a new prize (additional prize) occurs during continuous production, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special figure fluctuation received from the main control device 110 passes through the V of the voice lamp control device 113. This is an effect to prevent additional winning because it is different from the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation referred to in the possible fluctuation determination process.

After operating the left and right frame buttons 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) at the same time, when the first small hit A game is started, continuous production continues in the main display area Dm in the small hit medium production. As a continuous display indicating that the button is to be performed, "one more time !!" (corresponding to the chance effect of FIG. 19 (a)) is displayed (FIG. 28 (c)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1. Further, in the small area Ds3, "right-handed" indicating that the game is in a gaming state aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 28 (c), the small hits that are in the process of continuous production and are not determined to be able to pass through V are displayed with emphasis on the effect for notifying the player that the continuous effect will continue. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small hit game has occurred.

In addition, by notifying the player that the continuous production will continue, even if the small hit game this time is a small hit game that cannot pass through V (difficult), the player can use the small hit game from the next time onward. Since it will be noticed, there is an effect that dissatisfaction due to the occurrence of a small hit game that cannot pass through V (difficult) can be reduced.

Then, the second special figure change is started. First, a case where the second special figure change is a special figure change determined to be V passable change in the V passable change determination process will be described. When the second special figure change is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), a display indicating that either the frame left button 22a or the frame right button 22b is pressed (superimposed to FIG. 18 (b)). Along with the chance effect), a guidance display for guiding the position of the frame button is displayed in the guidance display area Dm2. In this state, the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol is fluctuating in the variable display area Dm1, and six reserved symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1. Then, the changing symbol indicating the second special figure variation is displayed in the small area Ds2, and "continuous effect in progress" indicating that the continuous effect is in progress is displayed in the small area Ds3.

The display indicating that continuous production is in progress displayed in this small area Ds3 is configured so that the display mode changes so as to suggest that the current fluctuation is a V-passable fluctuation, and the content of the comment and the content of the comment By changing the color of the comment, the color of the back surface on which the comment is displayed, and the like, it is possible to suggest to the player that this variation is a V-passable variation. With this configuration, the player can play the game while anticipating when the fluctuation corresponding to the V-passable fluctuation will come, and suppresses the situation where the pachinko machine 10 is tired of the production at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to.

In addition, after the fluctuation display determined to be V-passable fluctuation starts (after the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display corresponding to the V-passable fluctuation is determined), a new prize (additional prize) occurs. Even so, since the fluctuation pattern is not changed, a normal mode other than the operation effect of the frame button 22 using both hands is executed.

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed after the player operates any of the frame buttons 22, it is suggested that the small hit provided this time in the main display area Dm is a small hit that can pass V. "Rush" (corresponding to the super chance effect of FIG. 18 (b)) is displayed (FIG. 29 (b)). In this state, the symbol "757" indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit is stopped and displayed in the variable display area Dm1.

The display screen displayed in FIG. 29 (c) is a display screen when the second special figure change is stopped and displayed when an additional prize is generated during the first special figure change. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) assumed in advance and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) actually received from the main controller 110 are different due to the occurrence of the additional prize in this way, the fluctuation this time passes through V. This display (corresponding to the throbbing effect of FIG. 18B) in which the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the fluctuation is possible is unknown is used. In this display screen, even when an additional prize is not generated, for example, when the player does not operate the frame button 22, or when the fluctuation other than the final fluctuation of the continuous effect is the V-passable fluctuation, the V It is configured to be displayed even when a big hit is not given in the small hit game won by the passable fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation is started.

By using such a display screen, it is possible to execute a series of effects in which a plurality of fluctuations are related even when an additional prize is generated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect display that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Next, when the V-passable small hit is executed after the screen of FIG. 29 (b) is displayed, it is emphasized that V can pass through the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 30 (a). Along with displaying "Aim for V !!" (corresponding to the super chance effect of FIG. 19A), which is a V-passing highlighting display, the position of the second variable winning device 650 is guided in the guidance display area Dm2. A guidance display is displayed.

Further, in the small area Ds3, "super chance" indicating that continuous production is in progress is displayed, and "right-handed" indicating that the game is in a gaming state aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10, "continuous production" (FIG. 28 (b)), "chance" (FIG. 29 (a)), and "super chance" (FIG. 29) are displayed to indicate that continuous production is in progress. Three comments such as 30 (a)) are displayed, and this is executed whether or not the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is a V-passable fluctuation, or after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The small hit A game is set to suggest the degree of expectation indicating whether or not the V-passable small hit. Therefore, if the first special figure fluctuation is a fluctuation that can pass through V during continuous production, it may be suddenly displayed as "super chance".

Finally, during the small hit game, when the ball passes through the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific area in the second variable winning device 650, and a big hit is given, as shown in FIG. 30B, the main display area. A display indicating that a big hit has occurred is made in Dm, and in the guidance display area Dm2, a guidance display for guiding the position of the first variable winning device 65 opened during the big hit game is displayed.

As described above, in the continuous production of the pachinko machine 10, a small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation from the start of the first special figure fluctuation (special figure fluctuation display 1 (see FIG. 27 (a))) ( Since the small hit medium display 2 (see FIG. 28 (a)) is executed as a series of related effects up to the execution of the small hit game, the same effect is used for the first small hit and the second small hit. Instead of displaying, the first small hit is a continuous highlight that emphasizes that the continuous production continues, and the second small hit is a V that emphasizes that it is a small hit that can pass through. Since the highlighting is executed, the player can be made to recognize two consecutive small hit games as one continuous game, and the small hit game that cannot pass through V (difficult) is executed. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

If an additional prize is generated between the start of the first special figure change and the start of the second special figure change, the change pattern (variation time) of the second special figure change. However, since it differs from the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that was assumed in advance, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the small hit game corresponding to the second special figure fluctuation that was assumed in advance and the actual second time. There is a problem that the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate in the small hit game corresponding to the fluctuation of the special figure of the above is different, and it is not possible to execute a satisfactory continuous production.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to make it difficult for additional winning of the ball to occur in a predetermined period (the period from the start of the first special figure change to the start of the second special figure change). As an additional winning prevention effect, an operation effect (see FIG. 29B) of the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a and frame right button 22b) using both hands is executed. By executing such an effect, the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, so that it is possible to reduce the number of balls fired during that period, and as a result, the occurrence of additional prizes during a predetermined period is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned additional winning, the effect using the frame button 22 for temporarily interrupting the game by the player is executed, but the player is interrupted by the game. If it is an effect, other effects may be used, or a display indicating that the firing of the ball is stopped may be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display contents of the continuous effect are different when an additional prize is generated. For example, a small hit game corresponding to the second special figure change based on the occurrence of the additional prize. The winning ball V gate arrival timing in the above is calculated again, and based on the calculation result, the effect display corresponding to the second special figure change (special figure change display 2 (see FIG. 27)) and the second special figure change are used. The content of the effect display (small hit medium display 2 (see FIG. 27)) corresponding to the small hit game may be reset. By doing so, even if an additional prize is generated, the continuous production can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, special variation B to special variation C are defined for each number of reserved balls as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol used during the continuous production (see FIG. 13). It may be specified that the same variation pattern is selected even if the numbers are different. With this configuration, for example, the fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved balls is 7, and the fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved balls is 6, are set to the same fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation B). By doing so, even if an additional prize is generated during the continuous production and the second special figure change is executed on hold 7, the change pattern does not differ. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a preset continuous effect.

In this embodiment, it is a super chance whether the special figure fluctuation (small hit game) during the continuous production is executing the chance production (the production suggesting that the possibility of becoming a big hit is low based on the fluctuation). It is configured so that it is possible to notify the player whether or not the effect (the effect suggesting that the probability of a big hit is high based on the fluctuation) is being executed. It is a display mode that notifies that is being executed, and it is difficult to grasp whether the special figure fluctuation (small hit game) this time is executing the chance production or the super chance production. The display mode may be used. By doing so, the player can expect a plurality of special figure fluctuations to be executed until the continuous production is completed, so that the situation of getting bored with the game at an early stage can be suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect is executed when the V-passable variation is determined by the V-passable variation determination process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the V-passable variation is not determined. However, the continuous effect may be executed on the condition that the small hits A are continuous. Further, when the small hit A and another small hit (small hit B or small hit C) are continuous, the continuous effect may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of executing the continuous production, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the first embodiment, the above-mentioned continuous effect is executed when the winning information of the special symbol is held and stored so that the small hit A is continuously executed, but other than that. In some cases, the continuous effect may be executed. For example, even if a plurality of small hits A are stored in the reserved winning information (up to 8) in an order in which the small hits A are not continuously executed, the continuous effect may be executed. .. In the case of such a configuration, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the winning game when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is not the small hit A (when the result of the hit / fail judgment is off or the small hit other than the small hit A). The time (small hit game time) may be calculated in advance, and when it is determined that the small hit A held and stored is a small hit that can pass through V, the continuous effect may be executed.

Further, as described above, when the continuous effect is executed including the case where the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is not the small hit A, the fluctuation time specified when the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is the small hit A The total time of the game time of the small hit A is set so that the fluctuation time specified when the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is the same, and the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is the small hit A. The time specified in the case of the sum of the fluctuation time and the game time of the small hit A, and the fluctuation time specified when the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is a small hit other than the small hit A and other than the small hit A It is advisable to set so that the total time of the game time is the same as the total time.

By doing so, regardless of the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the start of the change of the next special symbol, that is, the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is lost. In the case of, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol until the symbol indicating that the discrimination result of the special symbol is out of order is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is a small hit other than the small hit A. In the case of a hit, from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the end of the small hit game executed after the symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol is a small hit other than the small hit A is stopped and displayed. Since the period can be unified, it is possible to reduce the process of determining whether or not the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied.

Further, in the first embodiment, there is one type of small hit that is determined to be a V-passable small hit (small hit A), but a plurality of types of small hits that are determined to be V-passable small hits are provided. In some cases, the above-mentioned continuous effect may be executed. For example, small hit A1 (no 8R time reduction as a big hit set when passing V) and small hit A2 (10R time reduction as a big hit set when passing V) are classified as small hits that can pass through V. 8 times) is specified.

Then, the small hit A1 that can pass through V is stored as the winning information that is executed first in the reserved winning information, and the small hit game corresponding to the small hit A1 is stored in the winning information that is executed later. If the small hit A2, which is executed at the timing when the V can be passed, is stored, the player is notified not to let the ball pass through the V during the small hit game corresponding to the small hit A1. Execute.

With this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of small hit types having different benefits (big hit types) given by passing the ball through V during the small hit game, the small hit is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to guide the player to pass V at the hit. In the above-mentioned example, an example of displaying a guidance effect of passing V through a small hit that is more advantageous to the player among a plurality of small hit types is shown. The information may be configured to notify only that there are a plurality of small hits that can pass through V in the information. As a result, the player decides which small hit game to pass the ball through V by himself / herself and plays the game, which has an effect of improving the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the continuous jackpot effect among the display modes displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 31 is a timing chart showing the flow of the continuous jackpot effect and the operation control of various devices.

Here, the continuous jackpot production will be described. The continuous jackpot effect is the timing at which the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in the small hit A game when the small hit A is won in the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first rotation after the jackpot ends. And the timing at which the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 is in the guided state is calculated in advance, and the timing at which the change of the special symbol of the first rotation is started after the end of the jackpot, that is, the jackpot game It is determined whether the end timing is the timing at which the small hit A game of the first rotation after the end of the big hit can pass through the passage detection switch 650e5 in the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific region, and the effect is produced based on the determination result. Is what determines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous jackpot effect is satisfied, the main control device 110 executes the special variation A as the variation pattern of the special figure variation of the first rotation after the end of the jackpot (FIG. 13). (See), then the small hit A game is executed.

Further, when the condition for executing the continuous big hit effect is satisfied, in the third symbol display device 81, the passage detection switch in the V discharge flow path 650e3 in which the small hit A game of the first rotation after the end of the big hit is a specific area. An effect display (final round effect display) based on the timing at which the ball can pass through the 650e5 is executed in the final round of the jackpot game. Then, the ending effect display of the jackpot game is executed based on the game result of the final round. Then, the special figure variation display and the small hit medium effect display are executed based on various commands set by the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the V gate 650d is changed to a guided state (a state in which a ball can pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3) for 1.5 seconds as its operation even during the jackpot game, and then regulated for 3.5 seconds. The operation of changing to a state (a state in which the ball cannot pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 (difficult)) is set as one cycle (5 seconds), and the cycle is repeatedly executed.

Here, the jackpot end timing for making the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot end into a small hit that can pass through V will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, when the condition for executing the continuous big hit effect is satisfied, the special figure change of the first rotation after the end of the big hit is executed, and then the small hit based on the special figure change is executed. In the game, the time until the winning ball V gate arrival timing, which is the timing when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 reaches the V gate 650d, is set to 35 seconds (special variation A: 30 seconds + small hit game). The time from the execution of is 5 seconds until the winning ball reaches the V gate).

The ending period of the jackpot game is fixed at 5 seconds (see FIG. 14). That is, the winning ball V gate arrival timing is set 40 seconds after the final round of the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, if the operating status of the V gate 650d at the timing when the final round of the jackpot game ends is the timing when the V gate 650d becomes the guided state after 40 seconds, the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the jackpot ends. The game can be a small hit that can pass V.

That is, in the present embodiment, since the V gate 650d repeatedly executes a constant operation control in a cycle of 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 31, if the V gate 650d is in the guided state at the final round end timing of the jackpot game. , The small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big hit can be a small hit game that can pass V.

The final round end timing of this jackpot game is when the final round is time over (30 seconds have passed), or in the final round, a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) have been won in the first variable winning device 65. It is the timing of the case. Specifically, in the case of a normal game, the first variable winning device 65 is designed to win a predetermined number of balls (10 in this embodiment) before the time is over. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the tenth prize is won in the final round of the jackpot game is the end timing of the final round of the jackpot game.

Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32, among the effect displays displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the final round effect display displayed corresponding to the final round of the jackpot game has a plurality of effects. The selection target (for example, Omikuji) is displayed, the selection unit (for example, the cursor) for switching the selection target at a predetermined interval (for example, 1.5 second interval) is displayed, and the final round end timing of the jackpot game is the jackpot. If the timing is such that the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end can be made into a small hit that can pass through V, the ending time of the big hit game is used to indicate that fact. ..

In the present embodiment, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, and the final round of the jackpot game is set to 30 seconds at the longest. Therefore, during the final round of the game, the final round end timing is the jackpot end. It is possible to set the timing at which the small hit based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation becomes a small hit that can pass through V multiple times. Therefore, even if the ratio of the balls fired during the jackpot game to win the first variable winning device 65 is different (whether the balls are easy to enter or difficult to enter into the first variable winning device 65), the continuous jackpot effect is produced. It has the effect of being able to enjoy.

Further, since the final round end timing is determined by winning a predetermined number of balls fired by the player in the first variable winning device 65, for example, in the ending period of the jackpot game as a continuous jackpot effect, after the jackpot ends. When a display indicating that the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation is a small hit that can pass V is displayed, the game state that is advantageous to the player on his own (small hit that can pass V). It becomes possible to grasp that the acquisition has been obtained. Therefore, since it is possible to provide the player with a gaming machine capable of changing the result of the gaming by himself / herself, there is an effect that he / she can enthusiastically participate in the gaming.

In the present embodiment, the result of the continuous jackpot effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the winning sound when the ball, which is the final round end timing, wins the first variable winning device 65. May be configured to notify the player by changing. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect that the player notices but is not noticed by the people around him.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the V gate 650d is constantly driven after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, in the final round period of the big hit game, the small hit game based on the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the end of the big hit. Since it is possible to make it uncertain when the small hit that can pass V can be made, it is possible to prevent the player from being attacked and to provide the player with fair playability. It has the effect of being able to.

During the jackpot game state in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened, it is preferable that the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650 is not visible (difficult) to the player. With this configuration, during the jackpot game in which the above-mentioned continuous jackpot effect is executed, the player can perform the jackpot game while grasping the operating status of the V gate 650d in the second variable winning device 650. This has the effect of being able to provide fair playability to the player.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 33, the continuous jackpot effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 32 (a) shows a display screen of a round (9 rounds) immediately before the final round (10 rounds) in the jackpot game, or a pre-final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed in the interval period thereafter. 32 (b) is an example showing the display screen of the first half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round in the jackpot game.

FIG. 33 (a) is an example showing a display screen in the latter half of the final round effect (see FIG. 31) executed during the final round in the jackpot game, and FIGS. 33 (b) to 33 (c) are jackpots. This is an example showing a display screen of an ending effect display (see FIG. 31) executed during the ending period in the game.

First, in FIG. 32 (a), in the final round (10 rounds), a pre-notification display for notifying that the Omikuji game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, is about to start is displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment explaining the content of the fortune-telling game, which is a continuous jackpot effect, is displayed in the small area Ds2. In the small area Ds3, "right-handed" indicating that the game is in a gaming state aiming at the first variable winning device 65 is displayed. This display is displayed as an interval period between the 9th round and the 10th round (final round) from the middle of the 9th round.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in the final round (10 rounds), three Omikuji Dm4 are displayed in the main display area, and the selection cursor Dm3 pointing to each of the Omikuji in order is at a predetermined interval (1. A movement display that moves to the right is performed in 5 seconds). Further, in the small area Ds1, the number of winnings (10) and the number of winning balls (7), which are conditions for closing the attacker (specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65), are displayed, and the small area Ds2 is won. A comment is displayed explaining that the attacker closes when the number of balls reaches 10, that is, the fortune-telling is decided, and that the winning balls are counted and displayed in the small area Ds1.

The plurality of Omikuji Dm4s displayed in the main display area Dm have different display modes, and comments having different contents are displayed depending on the selected Omikuji. Then, when the end condition for closing the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 (when the number of winning balls exceeds 10 or when the predetermined time (30 seconds) is reached) is satisfied, the selection cursor is selected. Dm3 is stopped, and the fortune-telling pointed to by the stopped selection cursor Dm3 is enlarged and displayed (FIG. 33 (a)). In that state, the number of winning balls is displayed as 10 in the small area Ds1, and an explanatory comment indicating that the fortune-telling Dm4 has been determined is displayed in the small area Ds2.

Then, when the ending period of the jackpot game is reached, as shown in FIG. 33 (b) or FIG. 33 (c), the contents of the selected Omikuji Dm4 are displayed, and the game is performed on the same day using the small area Ds1 and the small area Ds2. The results of past Omikuji games are displayed. In FIG. 33 (b), "super-kichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling game, and in FIG. 33 (c), "daikichi" is displayed as a result of the fortune-telling game.

As a result of the Omikuji game, there are "Super Kichi", "Daikichi", "Nakakichi", and "Kokichi". It is selected when the big hit game ends at the timing and there is a big hit with a special symbol in the subsequent reserved balls, and "Daikichi" means that the first variable small hit game after the big hit ends can pass V. It is selected when the big hit game is finished at the timing, and "Nakayoshi" and "Kokichi" are selected when the big hit game is finished at the timing when the first variable small hit game after the big hit cannot pass V (difficult). When selected and "Nakayoshi" is selected, a privilege (gift of music or image) that does not directly affect the game is given.

By displaying the past history in this way, even if the continuous jackpot is not provided as a result of this continuous jackpot production, if there is "super-kichi" or "daikichi" in the past history, the next continuous jackpot production Even if there is no "super-kichi" or "daikichi" in the past history, if the end timing of the jackpot game is intentionally shifted a little, it may become "super-kichi" or "daikichi". There is an effect that the player can play the game enthusiastically because the game is played while performing the analysis.

In addition, when executing such a continuous jackpot effect, the player visually recognizes the inside of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot, that is, during the game of making the first variable winning device 65 win the ball. You should not be able to do it. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to capture the final round while grasping the opening / closing status of the gate and gradually adjusting the timing. In such a case, the cover member of the second variable winning device 650 is formed of a half mirror, and the lamp provided in the second variable winning device 650 is provided only when the game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 is performed. It is preferable to use a configuration in which (light emitting means) is made to emit light so that the inside can be seen.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 34 to 54. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then started up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (398 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (399, 99, 99, 398, 398, respectively in this embodiment) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (counter buffer 203i) of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as well as the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37. (S104), and then the start winning process associated with winning the first entry port 64a, the second entry opening A64b or the second entry opening B640b (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38 and 39 to 42.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is used. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. After executing the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, the door passage process (S109), the V pass process (S110), and the V gate drive control process (S111) are executed. Details of the door-passing process (S109), V-passing process (S110), and V-gate drive control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.

After finishing the processing of S111, the other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S112), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol N1) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e (variation display in the special symbol). Acquires the number of holds N2) (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: Yes). ) Since there is no reserved ball to start the variable display, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that either the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204: No), then The variation execution determination process is executed in order to determine which special symbol the variation is based on (S205). By executing the variation execution determination process (S205), the variation execution flag 203j indicating the special symbol for starting the variation is set. Details of this variation execution determination process (S205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

After finishing the process of S205, it is next determined whether or not to execute the variation in the special figure 1 (S206). In the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the variation execution flag 203j set by the variation execution determination process (S205) indicates the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206). In the processing of S206, when it is determined in the special figure 1 that the variation execution flag 203j indicates the variation execution, (S206: Yes), the process shifts to the processing of S207 in order to execute the variation in the special figure 1. ..

In the process of S207, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S207), and a reserved ball command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set. (S208). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). In the process of S209, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). In the present embodiment, the same special symbol variation start processing is executed for the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 (special symbol 1) and the variation of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

On the other hand, in the processing of S206, when the variation execution flag 203j is determined not to be the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S206: No), it is the case where the variation execution flag 203j is the variation execution in the special figure 2. In order to execute the variation of FIG. 2, the process shifts to the process of S210. In the processing of S210 to S212, the same processing as the above-described processing for the holding ball of the special symbol 1 (processing of S207 to S209) is performed for the holding ball of the special symbol 2.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S211). The reserved ball count command set here updates the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223c of the RAM 223. After setting the hold ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is shifted (S212), and the special symbol for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37. The fluctuation start process is executed (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 37. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, among the values of various counters stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the variation execution determination process (FIG. The stop symbol of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is set based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area according to S205) of 36. More specifically, in the case of a big hit of the special symbol 1, it is determined whether the big hit is the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2. Similarly, in the case of the big hit of the special symbol 2, it is determined whether the big hit is the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display performed by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) (this lottery). The result) is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S216: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table 202f (see FIG. 14A) (S217).

Specifically, if the lottery result this time is a jackpot A, a jackpot scenario a202f1 (see FIG. 14B) is set, and if it is a jackpot B, a jackpot scenario b202f2 (see FIG. 14C). ) Is set.

When the processing of S217 is completed, the time saving / medium counter 203h is set (initialized) to 0 (S218), and the process proceeds to the processing of S223.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S216: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit of the special symbol (S219). In the process of S219, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit of a special symbol, the small hit start setting process is executed to start the small hit (S220), and the process proceeds to the process of S221. .. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

If it is determined in the process of S219 that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S219: No), the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S221 as it is.

In the process of S221, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is larger than 0 (S221), and when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S221: Yes), The value of the time saving counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S222), and the process proceeds to S223. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is not 1 or more (0) (S220: No), the processing of S222 is skipped and the process proceeds to S223.

In the process of S223 executed after the process of S218, S221, or S222, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S215, are displayed. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of (S223).

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the variation execution determination process (S205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S205). This variation execution determination process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is a process executed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute based on the variation order stored in the variation order storage area 203k.

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203j is set to 0 to perform initialization (S301), and then the data of the variation order storage area 203k is acquired (S302). Then, the data in the variable order storage area 203k is shifted (S303). In the process of S303, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the variable order storage area 203k is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, 1st area-> execution area, 2nd area-> 1st area, 3rd area-> 2nd area, 4th area-> 3rd area, 5th area-> 4th area, 6th area-> 6th The data in each area is shifted such as 5 area, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area, and so on. After shifting the data, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area of the variable order storage area 203k is the special figure 1 (1) (S304).

When it is determined in the process of S304 that the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (1) (S304: Yes), the variable execution flag 203j is set to the variable execution (1) in the special figure 1 (S305). ), This process is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the special figure 1 (1) (S304: No), the data in the execution area is the special figure 2 (2). Set to variable execution with (S306), end this process, and return to the special symbol change process.

Next, the special symbol variation start processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol change start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 35) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters.

In the special symbol change start process, first, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the execution area in the special symbol hold ball storage area (S401). Next, in the process of S401, the data stored in the execution area in the special symbol hold storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored is acquired (S402). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 of the special symbol is acquired.

When the processing of S402 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the processing of S402 (S403). More specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S402 is compared with the jackpot determination value stored in the first random number table 202a, and the lottery result is acquired. As described above, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0", the lottery result of the big hit is obtained, and when it is "1 to 398", the small hit is selected as the lottery result other than the big hit (missing). The lottery result will be the result, and if it is "399", the lottery result will be out of order (see FIG. 10A).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result obtained in the process of S403 is a big hit (S404). In the process of S404, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S404: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S405).

More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the processing of S402 is referred to, compared with the random number value specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of four types of special symbols is compared. Among the types (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, big hit D), it is determined what the big hit type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (big hit with 2R time reduction) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (5R time reduction and jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10B). Of the four types of jackpots, jackpot C and jackpot D are set when the game ball passes through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the second variable winning device 650 in the small hit game. It is a big hit type, and any big hit type is given to each small hit type described later (see FIG. 11 (a)).

In the process of S405, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S405 is completed, the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (FIG. 12 (FIG. 12)) is based on the current gaming state (whether or not there is a time reduction), the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401. The jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to a)) (see S406), and the process proceeds to S412.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S406, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S404: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S407). In the process of S407, when the lottery result is determined to be a small hit (S407: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S408), and the current gaming state and hold The small hit variation pattern is determined based on the number of balls and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the process of S401 (S409), and the process proceeds to the process of S412.

In the process of S407, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small hit (S407: No), the lottery result is out of order, so the display mode of the out-of-order corresponding to the special symbol is set (S410).

In the process of S410, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-symbol symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area. 3 The stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 is determined.

When the processing of S410 is completed, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401 (S411), and the process proceeds to the processing of S412.

In the process of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S406, the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S401 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The relationship between each lottery result, the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 12 (a) to 12 (b) and FIG. 13).

When the processing of S406, S409 or S411 is completed, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S406, S409 or S411 is set (S412). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S405, S408 or S410 is set (S413). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 50). To. When the processing of S413 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the small hit start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this small hit start setting process (S220). This small hit start setting process (S220) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35), and is a process for setting the start of the small hit game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 is changed. By passing through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which the ball can be won in the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where it is more likely to be done.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the small hit start setting process (S220), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit A (S501). If it is determined to be a small hit A in the processing of S501 (S501: Yes), the small hit scenario a corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) is set using the small hit scenario table 202g (S501: Yes). S502).

On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the small hit is not A (S501: No), the small hit scenario b corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) is generated by using the small hit scenario table 202 g. Set (S503).

After finishing the processing of S502 or S503, it is then determined whether or not the lottery result of this time is a small hit C (S504). If it is determined that the small hit C is in the process of S504 (S504: Yes), the big hit C is set as the big hit type when passing through V (S505), and this process is terminated.

on the other hand. If it is determined in the process of S504 that it is not the small hit C, (S504: No), the big hit D is set as the big hit type when passing through V (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the ball enters (starts) the first ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port A64b, or the second ball entry port B640b. Whether or not there is a winning prize) is determined, and when there is a starting winning prize, the value indicated by the various random number counters is held and the lottery result of each special symbol is pre-read from the held values indicated by the various random number counters. It is a process for.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has entered the first entry port 64a, the second entry opening A64b, or the second entry opening B640b (starting winning) (S601). .. Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port A64b, or the second ball entry port B640b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port A64b, or the second ball entry port B640b (S601: No), the process related to the start winning is executed. Since it is not necessary, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64a, the second ball entry port A64b or the second ball entry port B640b (S601: Yes), the process related to the start winning prize. Moves to the process of S602 in order to execute.

In the process of S602, the special figure 1 start winning process is executed in order to perform the process based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a (S602). The details of the special drawing 1 start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the process of S602 is completed, the special figure 2 start winning process is executed in order to perform the process based on the ball entering the second ball entry port A64b or the second ball entry port B640b (S603). The details of the special drawing 2 start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the process of S603 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed in order to execute the look-ahead of the lottery result of each special symbol (S604), and this process is terminated. The details of the look-ahead process (S604) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the special figure 1 start winning process (S602) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 1 start winning process (S602). This special figure 1 start winning process (S602) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), determines whether or not a ball has entered the first entry port 64a (starting winning), and the starting winning is won. If there is, it is a process to execute the hold of the value indicated by various random number counters.

In the special drawing 1 start winning process (S602), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first ball opening 64a (S701). In the process of S701, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first ball opening 64a (S701: No), it is not necessary to execute the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol. This process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S701, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entry port 64a (S701: Yes), then the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation display in the special symbol). (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

In the processing of S703, when it was determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d was the upper limit value (S703: No), the ball entered the first ball entry port 64a, but This is the case when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit. In this case, this process is terminated as it is without executing the process related to the start winning of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is a ball entering the first ball entry port 64a (S701: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 The value (N1) of the reserved ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S704). Then, a special figure 1 hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special symbol 1 hold ball number of RAM 223. It is stored in the counter 223b.

After setting the special figure 1 hold ball number command by the processing of S705, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. The value of the type counter C5 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S706), the special figure 1 is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203k (S707), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S707, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e are referred to, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is used, if the value is 3, the third area is used, if the value is 4, the fourth area is used, and if the value is 5, the fifth area is used. If the value is 6, the 6th area is set as the first area, and if the value is 7, the 7th area is set as the first area. By discriminating the value set in the variation order storage area 203k by the variation execution determination process (S205) described above, the ball entry port (starting port) changes the special symbol 1 as in the present embodiment. , Even if there are two types of fluctuations, one that fluctuates the special symbol 2, the fluctuations can be started in the order in which the entry port (starting port) is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the special figure 2 start winning process (S603) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special drawing 2 start winning process (S603). This special figure 2 start winning process (S603) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the presence or absence of a ball entering the second entry port A64b or the second entry port B640b (starting winning). Is a process for executing the hold of the value indicated by various random number counters when there is a start winning prize.

In the special drawing 2 start winning process (S603), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entry port A64b (starting winning) (S801). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port A64b (S801: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S805 in order to perform the same process as that of the first special symbol for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entry port A64b (S801: No), then the ball enters the second entry port B640b (starting prize). It is determined whether or not it has been done (S802). When it is determined that the ball has entered the second entry port B640b (S802: Yes), the process proceeds to S803 in order to determine whether or not the ball has entered the normal second entry port B640b. To do.

In the process of S803, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is on (S803). When it is determined that the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is on (S803: Yes), the ball is entered within the period in which the entry into the second entry port B640b is set to be valid (normal). Therefore, the second special symbol is shifted to the processing of S805 in order to perform the same processing as that of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in the process of S803, when it is determined that the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is off (S803: No), it is set that the entry into the second entry port B640b is not effective (abnormal). Since it is within the period of time, after setting the error command (S804), the process proceeds to the process of S805.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. Execute using and.

In the process of S805, the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold times N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S805). Next, if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S806: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is added by 1 (S807), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball is added. A special figure 2 holding ball number command indicating the value of the number counter 203e is set (S808). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 and the winning opening type are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S809) and fluctuate. Special figure 2 is stored (set) in the first area of the sequential storage area 203k (S810), and this process is terminated. The determination of the first area in S810 is performed in the same manner as the process in S707.

Whether there is a ball entering the second entry port A64b and the second entry port B640b (S802: No), or even if there is an entry into the second entry port A64b or the second entry port B640b, it is special. If the value (N2) of the symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not less than 4 (S806: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the look-ahead process (S604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S604). This look-ahead process (S604) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39), is a process for determining the lottery result of each special symbol in advance and setting a winning information command based on the preliminary determination result. ..

In the look-ahead process (S604), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64a (starting winning) (S901). In the process of S901, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64a (starting prize) (S901: Yes), the first random number table 202a, the first big hit type selection table 202b, special drawing The preliminary determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) is acquired based on the type selection table 202c1 for 1 (S902).

On the other hand, in the process of S901, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first entry port 64a (the ball has entered the second entry port A64b or the second entry port B640b (starting prize)). (S9011: No), the preliminary judgment result (hit judgment result, big hit type, small hit type) is acquired based on the first random number table 202a, the first big hit type selection table 202b, and the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2. (S903).

When the processing of S902 or S903 is completed, the winning information command is set based on the preliminary determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) acquired in the processing of S902 or S903 (S904). The winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later, which is executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts a preliminary determination result (hit determination result, big hit type, small hit type) from the winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Store. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the effect based on the pre-determination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and the variation display of the second symbol and the second ball entry performed by the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 7) are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port B640b of the device 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is 1 or more (S1001). When it is determined in the process of S1001 that the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is 1 or more, the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is used to measure the ball entry possible period to the second entry port B640b. 1 is subtracted (S1002), and the process proceeds to S1003.

In the process of S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is 0 (S1003). In the process of S1003, when it is determined that the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is 0 (S1003: Yes), when the period for determining that the ball has entered the second entry port B640b as normal has elapsed. Therefore, the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to off (S1004), and the process proceeds to the process of S1005.

If the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is determined to be 0 in the process of S1001 (S1001: No), the processes of S1002 to S1004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1005. If it is determined in the process of S1003 that the value of the validity period measurement counter 203s is larger than 0 (S1003: No), the process of S1004 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S1005.

In the process of S1005, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S1005). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory attached to the second entry port B640b is performed. Includes during and during. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S1005: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S1005: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006), and the second symbol display device 83 If the display mode is not changing (S1006: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S1007). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1008), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not larger than 0 (not 0). When it is determined that (S1008: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1008: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S1009).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1010). In the process of S1010, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S1011).

When the processing of S1011 is completed, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired based on the second hit random number table 202d (S1012). Specifically, the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202d. As described above, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 199", it is determined that it is a hit of a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "200 to 398", it is out of the normal symbol. It is determined that.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S1012 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1013), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S1013: Yes), a win is made. The time display mode is set (S1014). In the process of S1014, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, when it is determined whether the time is being shortened (whether the value of the time reduction counter 203h is larger than 0) (S1015) and it is not during the time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203h is 0), it is determined. (S1015: No) Since the gaming state is not in a short time, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S1016), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds. Then (S1017), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1015, when it is determined that the time is being shortened (the value of the time saving counter 203h is larger than 0) (S1015: Yes), the gaming state is being shortened, so that the opening time of the electric accessory 640a is Is set to 0.5 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S1018), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (S1019), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the game state of the normal symbol is the time saving game state (time saving medium), the variable display time is "180 seconds →" as compared with the normal gaming state (non-time saving medium). It becomes very short as "1 second", and further, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance B640b becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 0.5 seconds x 2 times". Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second entry port B640b.

In the process of S1013, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S1013: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S1020). In the process of S1020, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds (S1017), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S1006, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1006: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S1021). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S1021, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1021: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1021, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S1021: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1022). In the process of S1022, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S1014, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) in the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S1020, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S1022, the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed when the second symbol display update process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed next. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1014 or the process of S1020.

Next, when the variable display being executed by the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S1023). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S1023: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance B640b is set (S1024). When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 50) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S1016 or the process of S1018 are completed.

When the processing of S1024 is completed, in order to measure the opening period of the electric accessory 640a set in the processing of S1024, the special figure 2B validity period flag 203r is set to ON (S1025), and the validity period measurement counter 203s is set to 1000. (2 seconds) is set (S1026), and this process ends. By the processing of S1025 and S1026, it is possible to determine whether the timing at which the game ball enters the second entry port B640b is the opening period of the electric accessory 640a. That is, it is possible to detect that the game ball has entered the second entry port B640b due to fraudulent acts or the like even though the electric accessory 640a is not in the opening period.

In the present embodiment, since the opening operation of the electric accessory 650a is executed twice for 0.5 seconds in the time-saving gaming state, the opening operation of the electric accessory 650a is completed during the opening operation time. The valid period of the special figure 2B is 2 seconds including the allowable time for the ball to pass through the second entry port B640a, and the timer interrupt process of the main control device 110 executed in a cycle of 2 milliseconds is used. Although 1000 is set in the valid period measurement counter 203s to be subtracted, for example, the valid period may be set for each opening operation of the electric accessory 650a.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1023, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S1023: No), it is not necessary to perform the opening control of the electric accessory 640a, so the processing of S1024 to S1026 is skipped and the present End the process.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1103).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S1103: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S1104). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f added in the process of S1104, the normal symbol reserved ball number command is set (S1105).

The normal figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) described later. Inside, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal figure hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f from the normal figure hold ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the normal figure hold ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223d.

When the processing of S1105 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) described above is changed to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the area (area to reserved fourth area) (S1106). In the process of S1106, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the normal figure pre-determination result is acquired based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the processing of S1106 and the second random number table 202d (S1107), and the normal figure is based on the normal figure pre-determination result. The winning information command is set (S1108), and this process ends.

The general figure winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) to be executed later by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the Fuzu winning information command, it extracts the Fuzu pre-determination result from the Fuzu winning information command, and stores the extracted value in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the effect based on the result of the pre-determination of the normal drawing.

Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol, and the larger the number of reserved balls, the more the game. It is set to be advantageous to the person. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the second entry port B640b provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is an advantageous gaming state as compared with the normal gaming state.

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the general drawing, the player can play the game without overlooking the gaming state which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when the effect is performed using the pre-judgment result of the normal figure, not only the effect based on the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal figure but also the electric accessory 640a when the normal figure is judged to be a hit is opened. It is good to perform a production that suggests the timing. By doing so, in the normal game state, the game is performed aiming at the game area on the left side of the game board 13, and the second ball entry device 640 (the device to which the electric accessory 640a is attached) is placed on the right side of the game board 13. Even if it is arranged, it is possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed) before the electric accessory 640a opens, and even in a normal game state, the first 2 There is an effect that the possibility that a ball enters the ball entry port B640b can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the door passage processing (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the door passage processing (S109). This door-passing process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and is a process for determining whether or not the winning of the ball to the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is normal.

In this door passage processing (S109), first, it is determined whether the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 has detected a ball (S1201). In the process of S1201, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 does not detect the sphere, that is, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is not set to ON ( S1201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 has detected a sphere, that is, when it is determined that the passage detection switch (passage detection switch) 650a1 is set to ON (S1201). : Yes), as of now, it is determined whether or not the second variable winning device 650 is within the passable period (within the passable period) by referring to the small hit scenario being executed (S1202).

In addition to the motion control scenario executed during the small hit game, each small hit scenario includes a ball that has won a prize in the second variable winning device 650 (door 650f) in order to determine an abnormality during the small hit game. A period for validly (normally) handling and a period for effectively (normally) handling a ball that has passed through a specific area in the second variable winning device 650 are set (see FIG. 15).

If it is determined in the process of S1202 that it is within the passable period (S1202: Yes), a door passing command is set (S1203), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that it is not within the passable period (S1202: No), an error command is set (S1204), and this process is terminated.

The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is voiced in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) to be executed later by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the lamp control device 113 and an external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. Execute using and.

In this way, for the winning of the second variable winning device 650, even during the small hit game, the winning (normal) period and the non-valid (abnormal) period are provided. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally winning the ball to the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game.

Further, since the period during which the passage of the door 650f is valid (passable period) is set in the small hit scenario, the opening pattern of the door 650f whose operation is controlled during the small hit game is changed depending on the type of small hit. In the case (when a different small hit scenario is selected), the opening pattern of the door 650f and the passable period can be set in association with each other, and the passable period suitable for the opening pattern of the door 650f can be easily set. It has the effect of being able to.

In the present embodiment, when the passage of the ball is outside the passable period (S1202: No), only the error command is set without setting the door passage command, but the door passage command is set. You may want to set the error command above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the V-passing process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S110). This V-passing process (S110) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), and determines whether the ball has normally passed through the specific area (passing detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650. This is the process of determining.

In this V-passing process (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the passing detection switch 650e5 provided in the V discharge flow path 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected the ball (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the pass detection switch 650e5 does not detect the sphere, that is, when it is determined that the pass detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S1301: No), this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S1301, when it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a sphere (S1301: Yes), then whether or not the present is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario is determined. Determine (S1302).

In the process of S1302, if it is determined that the period is not within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S1302: No), an error command is set (S1303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1302, if it is determined that the period is within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S1302: Yes), then the small hit type of the running small hit game is set. The jackpot type value is read (S1304). That is, when the running small hit game is a small hit C, the big hit C is read as the big hit type value, and when the running small hit game is other than the small hit C, the big hit D is read as the big hit type value (FIG. 11 (a). )reference).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type value read in S1304 is the jackpot C (S1305), and if it is determined to be the jackpot C in the processing of S1305 (S1305: Yes), the jackpot C is indicated. The V flag 203m is set to on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to “1”) (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when it is determined that the hit is other than the jackpot C (big hit D) (S1305: No), the V flag 203m indicating the jackpot D is set to on (for example, the V flag 203m is set to "2"). (S1309), and shift to S1307.

Then, after the processing of S1306 or S1309 is executed, the V passage command is set (S1307), and then the time saving / medium counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1308).

In this way, even during the small hit game for winning the second variable winning device 650, a small period is provided for valid (normal) period and non-valid (abnormal) period for the winning. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball to a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the winning game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere outside the passable period, an error command is set and this process is terminated without setting the V flag 203m on. Since the V flag 203m is not set to ON even if the ball passes through a specific area outside the passable period, even if the ball is illegally passed to a specific area during the small hit game, the big hit is made after the small hit game is completed. The game is never executed. Therefore, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether the timing at which the sphere passes through the specific region is normal and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is determined. The configuration may be used.

For example, the case where the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small hit game may be determined as abnormal. This is a configuration in which one ball that can pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during one small hit game is made into one by controlling the operation of each configuration of the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment. It is adopted. Therefore, the case where the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two or more balls in one small hit game may be determined as an abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, after it is determined that the passage detection switch 650e5 has detected a sphere, it is determined whether the detection of the sphere (passage of a specific area) is within the passable period. The detection of an outside sphere (passage of a specific area) can be treated as an abnormality. For example, it is determined first whether the current state is within the passable period, and if it is within the passable period, the pass detection switch 650e5. May be configured to determine if a sphere has been detected.

Further, based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650a1 for detecting the winning of the door 650f and the passage detection switch 650e5 which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650a1 detects the ball during one small hit game. The case where the passage detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere may be determined as an abnormality even though the passage detection switch 650e5 is not detected.

By doing so, for example, it is possible to monitor an illegal game in which a ball is retained in the V discharge flow path 650e3 and the ball retained within the passable period is passed to a specific region.

In addition, a means for determining whether or not the small hit game this time is a small hit that can pass through V is provided, and the determination result is used to pass the small hit despite the case of a small hit that cannot pass through V (difficult). When the detection switch 650e5 detects a sphere, it may be determined as an abnormality.

It should be noted that the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the ball that first wins the second variable winning device 650 after the small hit game is executed as in the present embodiment can win the V discharge flow path 650e3. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor illegal games more reliably.

That is, when an attempt is made to illegally pass a ball through the passage detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the passage detection switch 650e5 is not allowed to win any ball in the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. When the ball is detected, it can be determined as abnormal, and further, if even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, the passage detection switch 650e5 detects two balls, which is an abnormality. It becomes possible to discriminate.

Further, in the case of the small hit game in which the small hit game cannot pass through V, the ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the pass detection switch 650e5, so that the ball passes through the pass detection switch 650e5. Since the number of balls to be played is one, but the passing detection switch 650e5 has detected the ball during the small hit game in which V cannot pass, it can be determined that the ball is abnormal.

If the discrimination result of each abnormality discrimination process described above is determined to be abnormal, an error command may be set so that the error command can be output to the outside. In this case, the error command may be configured to include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for simply determining whether or not the generated abnormality is an abnormality caused by an illegal game. For example, the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 ( The abnormality determined that the number of balls that have passed through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) is larger than the number of balls that have passed through the specific area (passage detection switch 650a1) is highly likely to be an illegal game, so the priority information has a high priority. Is set, and an abnormality in which it is determined that the ball has passed a specific area outside the passable period during the small hit game may be caused by ball play, so priority information with a low priority is set. ..

In this way, although any abnormality cannot occur in a proper game, by setting a priority among them, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time in one pachinko machine 10, an abnormality with a high priority is given. Can be preferentially notified, and there is an effect that processing after an abnormality can be smoothly performed.

It should be noted that each abnormality determination process for the passage of the sphere to the specific region may be a combination of all of them, or a part thereof may be appropriately combined.

As a result of each abnormality determination process described above, the error command set when an abnormality is determined is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (FIG. FIG. In the external output process (S1701) of (see 50), the command is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives an error command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the content of the error from the error command, and notifies the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227 based on the extracted content. Execute using and.

Next, the V-gate drive control process (S111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this V-gate drive control process (S111). This V-gate drive control process (S111) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) to control the drive of the V-gate 650d controlled by the main control device 110. The open counter 203n and the closed counter 203o used in the V-gate drive control process both add 1 to the counter value because the counter value is added in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds. Then, 2 milliseconds have passed.

In the V-gate drive control process (S111), first, it is determined whether or not it is the first interrupt process after the power is turned on (S1401). In the process of S1401, when it is determined that it is the first interrupt process after the power is turned on (S1401: Yes), the V gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON (S1402), and the V gate 650d is brought into the induction state (open).

Then, a V-gate state command indicating that the state of the V-gate 650d is an induction state (open) is set (S1403), the value of the open counter 203n is added by 1 (S1404), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1401, when it is determined that it is not the first interrupt processing after the power is turned on (S1401: No), it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is 0 (S1405). In the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is not 0 (S1405: No), then it is determined whether the value of the open counter 203n is larger than 750 (whether 1.5 seconds have passed). (S1406).

If it is determined in the process of S1406 that the value of the open counter 203n is not larger than 750 (750 or less) (S1406: No), the open counter 203n is incremented by 1 in S1404, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the value of the open counter 203n is larger than 750 (S1406: Yes), the value of the open counter 203n is reset to 0 (S1407), and the V-gate solenoid 650d2 is set to off. (S1408), the V gate 650d is put into a regulated state (closed).

Then, a V-gate state command indicating that the state of the V-gate 650d is a regulated state (closed) is set (S1409), the value of the closing counter 203o is added by 1 (S1410), and this process is terminated.

Further, in the process of S1405, when the value of the open counter 203n is determined to be 0 (S1405: Yes), that is, the value of the open counter 203n is once larger than 750, and the value of the open counter 203n is the value in S1407. When is reset to 0, then it is determined whether the value of the closing counter 203o is larger than 1750 (whether 3.5 seconds have passed) (S1411).

In the process of S1411, if the value of the closure counter 203o is not larger than 1750 (1750 or less) (S1411: No), the value of the closure counter 203o is added by 1 (S1410), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the value of the closure counter 203o is larger than 1750 (S1411: Yes), the value of the closure counter 203o is reset to 0 (S1412), and the V-gate solenoid 650d2 is set to ON. (S1413), a V-gate state command indicating opening is set (S1414), the value of the opening counter 203n is added by 1 (S1415), and this process is terminated.

The V-gate state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V gate state command, the voice lamp control device 113 can extract the state of the V gate 650d from the V gate state command and grasp the operating state of the V gate 650d. In particular, the V-gate state command set in S1403 is used when the voice lamp control device 113 sets the V-gate scenario 222c (see FIG. 58).

As described above, the V gate 650d in the present embodiment is controlled so that a constant operation (an operation of repeating opening for 1.5 seconds and closing for 3.5 seconds) is always performed after the power is turned on. ing.

In addition, as a control in which a constant operation is always performed, in the present embodiment, the induction (open) state and the regulated (closed) state are set in advance by the values counted by the counters (opening counter 203n and closing counter 203o), respectively. Although the control for switching the operating state of the V gate 650d is performed when the counter value is reached, other configurations may be used.

For example, an operation scenario (feature operation scenario) that defines the operation content of the V gate 650d is provided, and a counter is counted every time a timer interrupt that is periodically (2 milliseconds cycle) is executed by the main controller 110. The operation scenario that defines the operation content of the V gate 650d is updated using the value of the counter (accessory operation counter), and the V gate 650d is configured to operate based on the updated operation scenario content. May be good. In this case, since the V gate 650d only repeatedly executes a constant operation, it is preferable to configure the V gate 650d so as to loop one operation scenario.

Further, when a counter (accessory operation counter) for updating the operation scenario (accessory operation scenario) of the V gate 650d is used as described above, the value of the accessory operation counter is used as the value of the variation type counter CS1. You may use it. With this configuration, it is possible to select the variation type associated with the operation of the V gate 650d (accessory). Further, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of control processes executed by the main control device 110 based on a common counter value.

For example, the fluctuation type (variation time) of the special symbol selected is different between the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state and the value of the counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the closed state. It is advisable to construct a variation pattern selection table for special symbols. Specifically, the counters referred to in the fluctuation pattern selection tables 202e1 to 202e3 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) set in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202 (see FIG. 11) are used from the fluctuation type counter CS1. Change to the value of the operation counter. Then, in the process of acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 (see S401 in FIG. 37) of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37), the value of the accessory operation counter is acquired and acquired instead of the variation type counter CS1. Select the fluctuation pattern by referring to the value of the accessory operation counter.

As the fluctuation pattern selected with reference to the accessory operation counter, for example, in the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (see FIG. 13), which is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit The fluctuation pattern set corresponding to A is the value of the accessory operation counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state and the value of the accessory operation counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the closed state. The fluctuation pattern selected in is set to be different, and among them, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set corresponding to the value of the accessory operation counter indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open state is set as the fluctuation pattern. It is preferable to set so that the small hit in which is executed is a small hit that can pass through V.

That is, the period until the lottery result of the special symbol is confirmed and displayed as the small hit A (variable time) and the period from the start of the small hit A game until the ball can pass through the specific area 650e5 (small hit). After the total period from the start of the game to the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate (see FIG. 27) and 5 seconds in the first embodiment) has elapsed, the fluctuation pattern (variation) so that the V gate 650d is in the open state. Time) is set. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is set. As a result, when the change of the special symbol that has won the small hit A starts at the timing when the V gate 650d is open, it is possible to provide the small hit that can pass through V.

In this way, when the operating status of the accessory (V gate 650d) and the winning game (small hit A game) based on the lottery result of the special symbol are executed at specific timings (winning while the V gate 650d is open). Used for operation control of the accessory (V gate 650d) in a gaming machine in which a privilege (big hit game) advantageous to the player is given when the small hit A is executed so that the ball V gate arrival timing arrives. By configuring the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be selectable using the value of the counter (accessory operation counter), it is executed when the accessory is in a predetermined operation mode (V gate 650d is in the open state). The variation of the special symbol to be performed can be changed to the variation of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player.

As a result, it becomes possible to execute a control in which the movement control of the character and the lottery of the special symbol, which have been independent in the past, are associated with each other, and the player can execute the operation status of the character and the timing when the special symbol is changed. You will play the game while being aware of that. Therefore, for example, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the result of the subsequent special symbol fluctuation will be affected by the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. That is, even if the special symbol variation (a special symbol variation that is out of the question or a special symbol variation that is unlikely to be a big hit) that the player is not interested in in the past, the player has a special symbol. Since it is not the result of the lottery of fluctuations but the timing when the special symbol fluctuations stop, it is possible to make the special symbol fluctuations interesting and prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern for each gaming state (normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 is provided, and a variation pattern selection corresponding to a gaming state (time-saving gaming state) in which the player is advantageous is provided. In the table, it is preferable to select the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) by referring to the value of the counter (feature operation counter) for controlling the operation of the accessory described above. With this configuration, for example, even if the value of the accessory operation counter is a value indicating that the accessory (V gate 650d) is open, the accessory (V gate 650d) is closed. Even if it is a value indicating the present state, the player can set the fluctuation pattern (variation time) so that the small hit A game started after the execution of the selected fluctuation pattern becomes a small hit that can pass through V. In an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to ensure that the small hit A game is a small hit that can pass through V. As a result, it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player in a state that satisfies the predetermined condition (time-saving game state) as a game state that is more advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved. There is an effect.

In the first embodiment, the counter (variation type counter CS1) referred to when the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is selected at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started (special symbol fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 37)). ) Is acquired, but other configurations may be used. For example, the timing at which the start winning process (see FIG. 39) is executed, that is, the starting winning opening (first entry opening 64a, first) The value of the counter (variation type counter CS1) referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the process executed when the ball enters the 2 entry port A64b and the 2nd entry port B640b). It may be configured to acquire.

Further, as a technique for using the value of the counter (accessory operation counter) used when controlling the operation of the V gate 650d in other control, the counter referred to when selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (the present embodiment). Although an example of using the variable type counter CS1) instead of the variable type counter CS1) is shown, the first random number counter C1 may be used instead. In this case, the value of the counter (role operation counter) for updating the operation scenario of the accessory (V gate 650d) may be used as it is, or a random number using the hit of the accessory operation counter is generated. The random number may be used as a substitute for the random number counter C1 per first.

Specifically, the value of the accessory operation counter (for example, 0 to 2500) added in the timer interrupt processing of the main control device 110 executed every 2 milliseconds, and the main processing of the main control device 110 A value that is a combination of the initial value random number counter value (for example, 0 to 2500) that is updated using the remaining time may be used instead of the first random number counter C1. As a result, the value of the counter used for the collision determination of the special symbol can be set in a complicated manner, so that it is difficult to be fraudulent. Further, by using the value of one counter (accessory operation counter) for a plurality of controls, the number of counters mounted on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the V gate 650d is controlled to be constant at all times. However, for example, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 hours) elapses, the period of the induction (opening) state may be extended. An operation control that is always executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be added, such as extending the period of being in the guided (open) state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the jackpot game is completed. ..

By doing so, it is possible to substantially change the probability that the big hit game is executed via the small hit game based on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game is surprising to the player. There is an effect that it becomes possible to provide.

Further, for example, on the condition that the occurrence of the big hit game via the small hit game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the timing at which the V gate 650d is in the guided (open) state is switched, or the guidance (open) is performed. The period of state may be shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to further complicate the timing at which the player can pass through a specific area in the small hit game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 6) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1612 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1612 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1715 in FIG. 50, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1612). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1708 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1711 and S1712 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (peripheral) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 issues the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 39), and the winning information command set in the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 42). Send to. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command and the like set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51) and the small hit opening command and the like set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 53) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the error command set in the door passing process (see FIG. 45) and the V passing process (see FIG. 46), the V gate state command set in the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47), and the like are executed. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

The external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by an external terminal plate (not shown). For example, various error commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. There is.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is reset to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the process of S1704 is completed, the small hit control process is executed (S1705). The details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port B640b of the second ball entry device 640 is executed (S1706). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S1024 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1016 or the processing of S1018 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37), the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation display according to the variation pattern. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is executed when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 37) ends. Is completed, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device (not shown) is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1017 or the process of S1019 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device. .. As a result, in the second symbol display device, variable display is performed in which the symbol "○" and the symbol "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1022 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 43), the variation executed in the second symbol display device. The display is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display) in the display mode set by the processing of S1014 or the processing of S1020 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 43). To do.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1710). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1710: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1710: No), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1711, S1712).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1711). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399,398 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1712).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1708 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1709, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1709: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 has been executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S1713 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1713), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1714). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1715), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1716), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1709 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1708, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1711 and S1712 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first specific prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1801). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 35) or the processing of S2107 of the small hit ending control processing (see FIG. 54) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set. To do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on passing through a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1801: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S1801, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S1801: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p (S1802), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is changed. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (S1803). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (see FIG. 14), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is 1. To determine.

In the processing of S1803, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1803: Yes), the jackpot opening command Is set (S1804), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the opening start (S1803: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the round start (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1805).

If it is determined in the processing of S1805 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1805: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the processing of S1806. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 on so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state), and then set the round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds ( S1807), this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1805, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the start of the round (S1805: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S1808). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or specified. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1808, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1808: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is set to the currently executed round. The counter value corresponding to the end of the round is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value (S1809), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1808 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process from the next time onward. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). When the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls win) becomes a jackpot scenario. It is possible to execute based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of facilitating the design and preventing the situation where both motion controls are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1808 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not satisfied (S1808: Yes), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the end of the round. It is determined whether or not the value to be performed (the counter value is 8750 in the case of the jackpot scenario a) (S1810).

If it is determined in the processing of S1810 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the round (S1810: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the processing of S1811. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to be off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. The discrimination processing from S180 to S1810 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1810, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the round (S1810: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the interval start (corresponds to). In the case of the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1812). In the process of S1812, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1812: Yes), the interval command is set (S1813), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the interval start (S1812: No), the jackpot ending control process (S1814) is then executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the change of the special symbol. ..

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1814) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1814). This jackpot ending control process (S1814) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 51).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the ending start (counter value is 40751 in the case of jackpot scenario a) (S1901). If it is determined in the process of S1901 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1901: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S1902), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the ending start (S1901: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p corresponds to the ending end (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1903). If it is determined in the process of S1903 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1903: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1903, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203p is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1903: Yes), then the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1904) and the jackpot scenario is cleared. The scenario counter 203p is reset to 0 (S1905). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the jackpot executed this time is jackpot C (S1906). In the processing of S1906, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not jackpot C (big hits A, B, D) (S1906: No), the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 8 (S1907). This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type is jackpot C (S1906: Yes), this process ends as it is.

That is, when the jackpot type is other than jackpot C (big hit A, B, D), by setting the counter value of the time saving medium counter 203h to 8, from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol is changed eight times ( The lottery of the special symbol is executed eight times, and the game state is set to be the time-saving game state (time-saving state) until the result of the eighth lottery is stopped and displayed).

Next, the small hit control process (S1705) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1705). This small hit control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50), and the setting of a command for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hit, and the second identification. This is a process for controlling the operation of the stopper solenoid 650c2 that changes the positions of the door solenoid 650f2 for opening and closing the winning opening 650a and the stopper (ball stop member) 650c.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit scenario is set (S2001). Specifically, the processes of S502 and S503 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 38) are executed, and it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S2001 (S2001: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2001, if the small hit scenario is set (S2001: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q (S2002), and the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is the small hit. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the scenario (S2003). For example, when the small hit scenario a is set (see FIG. 15B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so that the small hit scenario counter 203q Determine if the value is 1.

In the processing of S2003, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S2003: Yes), the stopper is obtained by the processing of S2004. (Ball stop member) Set 650c to the ball stop position (set the stopper solenoid 650c2 to ON so that the stopper 650c can be changed to the ball stop position). Then, the opening command for small hits is set (S2005), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q does not correspond to the opening start (S2003: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the round start (in the small hit scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 626) (S2006).

In the processing of S2006, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed based on the small hit scenario in the processing of S2007. (Set the door solenoid 650f2 on and off so that the door 650f of the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state or the closed state), and the present process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, as the operation control executed based on the small hit scenario, the operation may be controlled so that the second specific winning opening 650a is opened and closed a plurality of times during one round of the small hit game. For example, when the small hit scenario is the small hit scenario b, the opening / closing operation in which the opening period of the second specific winning opening 650a is 0.1 seconds and the closing period is 0.9 seconds is repeated during one round. Is set to. Such operation control is executed in the process of S2007.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2006, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S2006: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition is satisfied (S2008). Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the second specific winning opening 650a is open.

In the process of S2008, when it is determined that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S2008: Yes), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is set to 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round. The subtracted value is updated (S2009), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2008 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured so that it is not determined that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control from the next time onward. There is.

Here, the small hit scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small hit counter 203q and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, as in the above-mentioned big hit scenario. There is. Therefore, when the round end condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). (The second specific winning opening 650a is closed), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the second specific winning opening 650a is closed). The operation control is configured to be executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, the motion control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the motion control that ends the round when a predetermined number of balls win) is based on the small hit scenario. Can be executed. Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a, when a predetermined time elapses, the operation is controlled based on the small hit scenario, and when a predetermined number of prizes are won, the operation is controlled without being based on the small hit scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing the above, and there is an effect that the design can be facilitated and the situation where both operation controls are mixed can be prevented.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2008 that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S2008: Yes), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the round end (small). If it is a hit scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 1000) (S2010).

If it is determined in the processing of S2010 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the end of the round (S2010: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the processing of S2011. (The door solenoid 650f2 is set to off so that the door 650f of the second specific winning opening 650a is closed), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2010, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q does not correspond to the end of the round (S2010: No), then the small hit ending control process (S2013) is executed. .. This small hit ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the small hit game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small hit game to the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S2012) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this small hit ending control process (S2012). This small hit ending control process (S2012) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 53).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the ending start (in the case of the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1001) (S2101). In the process of S2101, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the ending start (S2101: Yes), the small hit ending command is set (S2102), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q does not correspond to the ending start (S2101: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q sets the stopper (ball stop member) 650c. It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to the release of the ball stop that is changed to the release position (in the case of the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1125) (S2103). In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q corresponds to the release of the ball stop (S2103: Yes), the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is set to the release position (the stopper 650c is set). Stopper solenoid 650c2 is set to off so as to change from the ball stop position to the release position) (S2104), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, there is an interval of 0.5 seconds between the closing of the second specific winning opening 650a and the change of the stopper (ball stop member) 650c to the release position. This is the time provided for discharging the balls other than the balls retained by the stopper (ball stop) 650c out of the second variable winning device 650 among the balls winning in the second specific winning opening 650a. .. Therefore, at the timing when the stopper (ball stop member) 650c is changed to the release position, only one ball (the ball retained by the ball stop member 650c) exists in the second variable winning device 650, and the ball is present. It is configured so that it is possible to prevent other balls from obstructing the flow of the ball and to provide an appropriate game.

Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2103, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q does not correspond to the ball stop release (S2103: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is determined to pass V. It is determined whether or not the value corresponds to (in the case of the small hit scenario a, the counter value is 1500) (S2105).

Here, the V-pass determination indicates a timing for determining the result of the V-pass processing (see FIG. 46) executed in the timer interrupt processing of the main control device 110. In this V-pass processing, the ball is in a specific area (V discharge of the second variable winning device 650) within the V-pass valid period (counter value 1.25 to 1500 in the case of the small hit scenario a) set in the small hit scenario. The V flag 203m is set to ON when passing through the passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the flow path 650e3. That is, it is provided to determine whether the V flag 203m is set to ON by the process when passing through V at the timing when the valid period of passing through V has elapsed.

By doing so, it is possible to reliably perform processing based on the fact that the sphere has passed through the specific region within the V-passing valid period. Other configurations may be used. For example, when the V flag 203m is set to ON, the process may immediately proceed to the next process.

If it is determined in the process of S2105 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q does not correspond to the V passage determination (S2105: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2105, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203q is a value corresponding to the V passage determination (S2105: Yes), then it is determined whether the V flag 203m is set to ON. (S2106).

If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the V flag 203m is not set to ON (S2106: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag 203m is set to ON (S2106: Yes), then the jackpot type given to the executed small hit (in the case of small hit A, the jackpot type D). A jackpot scenario corresponding to (see FIG. 11A)) is set (S2107). Then, the V flag 203m is set to off (S2108), the jackpot type value when passing V is cleared (S2109), and this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, since all the small hit games are set as one round game, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (rounds). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. A small hit scenario may be set for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until one second elapses after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set the period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 to 72, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2201). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of the main processing (Fig. 56) It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of (see S2318) (S2202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 56, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2315 in FIG. 56), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2318. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2318 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2202: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2318 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2203: Yes), the process proceeds to S2204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2203: No), the process proceeds to S2208.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2204. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2318 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2203: No), and the data shifts to S2208.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2202: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2318, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2204 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2204). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2206). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2205: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S2208, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2318 is executed (see S2317 in FIG. 56). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2318 is executed, the process of S2208 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S2318 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2210), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S2208 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S2208 is performed via the processing of S2204 to S2206. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2208: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S2209, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2210), and then interrupt permission is set. (S2211). Then, the V-gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2212), and the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2209 is that when the processing of S2208 is reached via the processing of S2204 to S2206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2204. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S2301 was executed (S2301), 1 millisecond. If the above has not passed (S2301: No), the process proceeds to S2312 without performing the processes of S2302 to S2311. In the processing of S2301, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S2302 to S2311 are mainly processing related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2313 and the variation display setting process of S2314 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2313 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2314 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has passed in the process of S2301 (S2301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2303 to S2314 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2301: Yes). S2302). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2308 described later (S2303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2304). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2305 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold ball number display update process is executed (S2306). In the customer waiting effect processing, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. The setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the hold ball number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds1) is performed according to the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 223c.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2307). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 (frame left button 22a, frame right button 22b) operated by the player to enhance the effect is pressed is monitored, and the frame button is displayed. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of 22 is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set. A detailed description of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 71.

Further, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the stage is changed and the rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. You may. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S2307 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2308), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2309). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2310), and the process proceeds to the process of S2311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the process of S2310 is completed, the V counter update process for updating the value of the V counter 223t is executed (S2311). Details of this V-counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the processing of S2311 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S2312), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2313.

In the process of S2313, a command determination process of performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2313). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S2314). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

When the processing of S2314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2315). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2315 (S2315: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2317), and the power-off process is executed (S2318). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2319), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2315 (S2315: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2316), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2316: No), the process returns to the process of S2301 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2316: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2313) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2313). This command determination process (S2313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process (S2313), first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S2401). When the variation pattern command is received (S2401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S2402), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S2403), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If the variation pattern command has not been received (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2404). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 65) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2404: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2407). Then, when the stop command is received (S2407: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received stop command (S2408). On the other hand, if the stop command has not been received (S2408: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2409).

In the process of S2409, when the hold ball number command is received (S2409: Yes), the hold ball number counter of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) corresponding to the received hold ball number command is displayed. The value included in the received reserved ball count command is stored (S2410). Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special symbol 1 of the main controller 110 is transmitted from the received reserved ball number command. The value of the hold ball number counter 203d (the number of hold times N1 of the variation display in the special symbol 1) is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. After that, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set (S2411).

Here, the reserved ball number command is executed when a ball enters the first entry port 64a, the second entry opening A64b, or the second entry opening B640b (starting prize), or a special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted from the main control device 110 at that time, every time a start winning prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the number of balls reserved for the special symbol 1 of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S2410. The value of the counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, for example, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the starting prize is won. At the time of detection or lottery of a special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Further, for example, when the process of S2411 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 26A, the display control device 114 holds the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol based on the order in which the received display reserved ball number commands are received. The numerical symbols are displayed side by side in the small area Ds1. For example, the information stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203k of the main control device 110 is set as the fluctuation order command, and the voice lamp control device 113 is set. Display of the number of hold symbols to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold ball number command and the fluctuation order command received from the main control device 110 by the voice lamp control device 113. The corresponding information in order may be included in the display reserved ball count command and transmitted to the display control device 114. By doing so, the display control device 114 may display the hold ball number symbol based on the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 113, thus reducing the processing load of the display control device 114. It becomes possible to make it. Further, even when the change order of the special symbols is not the order in which the starting prize is won, the reserved ball number symbols of the first special symbol and the reserved ball number symbols of the second special symbol can be displayed side by side.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. In the process of S2409, if the hold ball number command is not received (S2409: No), then it is determined whether or not the V gate state command is received from the main control device 110 (S2412). Then, when the V-gate state command is received (S2412: Yes), the V-gate command reception process is executed (2413), and this process is terminated.

Here, the V-gate command reception process (S2413) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this V-gate command reception process (S2413). This V-gate command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is mainly used to grasp the operating status of the V-gate 650d. This is a process executed based on the V-gate state command received from the control device 110. By executing the V-gate command reception process, the operation of the V-gate 650d can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In addition, it is possible to determine whether the V gate 650d is operating normally.

In the V-gate command reception process, first, the V-gate state information based on the V-gate state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the V-gate state storage area 223j (S2501). Here, the V-gate state command received from the main control device 110 is set when the state of the V-gate 650d is changed by the V-gate drive control process (see FIG. 47) executed by the main control device 110. The V gate 650d is open (induction state where the ball can flow down the V discharge flow path 650e3) or closed state (regulation state where the ball cannot flow down the V discharge flow path 650e3 (difficult)). A command is set to indicate which state of.

Next, it is determined whether the V-gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502). The V-gate initial flag 223i is a flag that is set to be turned on in the start-up process (see FIG. 55) of the voice lamp control device 113 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S2502 that the V-gate initial flag 223i is set to ON (S2502: Yes), the V-gate status information stored this time indicates that the V-gate 650d is in the open (induction) state. It is determined whether the information is shown (S2503).

In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the information stored this time (V gate state information) is the information indicating that the V gate 650d is in the open (guided) state (S2503: Yes), the V gate scenario 222c Is set (S2506), and the V gate initial flag 223i is set to off (S2507). Next, the V gate opening timing is stored in the opening timing storage area 223k based on the set V gate scenario 222c (S2508).

That is, the series of processes from S250 to S2508 is a process executed only when the V gate initial flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the power of the voice lamp control device 113 is turned on, and the voice lamp When the power of the control device 113 is turned on, the voice lamp control is performed based on the V gate state command (V gate state command set in S1403 of the V gate drive control process (see FIG. 47)) received from the main control device 110. The V-gate scenario 222c provided in the ROM 222 in the MPU 221 of the device 113 is set. The V-gate scenario 222c defines an operation scenario corresponding to the V-gate drive control process of the main controller 110. When the V-gate scenario 222c is set, the V-counter update process (see FIG. 72) described later is set. Updates the V counter 223t.

Then, among the operation scenarios defined in the V gate scenario 222c, the content corresponding to the value of the V counter 223t is the current operation status of the V gate 650d. By providing the V-gate scenario 222c in the voice lamp control device 113 in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the operating status of the V-gate 650d. Further, by referring to the V-gate scenario 222c, it is possible to assume the operating status of the V-gate 650d in the future (for example, it is assumed that the V-gate 650d will be in the guided state from 3 seconds to 4.5 seconds later. It is possible to perform an effect based on the assumed information. Therefore, a futuristic operation situation of a movable object (V gate 650d) that affects the result of the game is assumed, and a game situation using the assumed information (a game state advantageous to the player in the future is executed). Since it is possible to execute an effect (game situation assumption effect) for notifying (whether or not), there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. When the V gate initial flag 223i is not set to ON in the processing of S2502 (S2502: No), or in the processing of S2503, the information stored this time (V gate status information) is that the V gate 650d is in the open state. When it is determined that the information indicates (S2503: No), it is determined whether the information stored this time and the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c match (S2504).

If it is determined in the process of S2504 that the information stored this time matches the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information stored this time does not match the contents of the V-gate scenario 222c (S2504: No), an error command is set (S2505), and this process ends.

In the processing of S2504, the update content of the V-gate scenario 222c set in S2506 is compared with the operating status of the V-gate 650d indicated by the V-gate status command received from the main controller 110, and the V-gate is normally performed. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not the 650d controls the operation. By doing so, it is possible to properly determine that the operation of the V gate 650d is not normally controlled.

In the process of S2504, it is determined whether the update content of the V-gate scenario 222c set in S2506 matches the operating status of the V-gate 650d indicated by the V-gate status command received from the main controller 110. However, for example, it may be configured to allow an error in a predetermined range.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the operation control content of the main control device 110 is compared with the V scenario update status of the voice lamp display device 113 to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. For example, V. A sensor for detecting the operation of the gate 650d may be provided, and the operation information of the V gate 650d detected by the sensor may be added to grasp the operation status of the V gate 650d. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether normal operation control is performed, and further, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation is actually operated with respect to the operation control content. Therefore, the V gate There is an effect that it can be more appropriately determined that the 650d is not operating normally.

In the present embodiment, the V gate 650d is configured to be controlled by a constant operation at all times, but as another configuration, the operation content of the V gate 650d is changed when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. When configured to change, for example, when the number of jackpots per day exceeds 10 times, or when 10 hours have passed since the power was turned on to the pachinko machine 10, one operation cycle of the V gate 650d When the control content is switchable so that the proportion of the guidance state (the state in which the V gate 650d is opened) is low (for example, the guidance state is 1 second and the regulation state is 4 seconds), the control contents are each. The V-gate scenario 222c corresponding to the above may be stored, and the V-gate scenario 222c and the V counter 223t may be reset at the timing when the control contents are switched. With this configuration, even if the operation control content of the V gate 650d is switched during the game, it is possible to immediately grasp the operation status of the V gate.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. In the process of S2412, if the V-gate command has not been received (S2412: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2414). Then, when the winning information command is received (S2414: Yes), the winning command receiving process is executed (S2415), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the winning command receiving process (S2415) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process (S2415). This winning command reception process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when the winning command is received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

In the present embodiment, when the winning information based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 is the winning information indicating the small hit A continuously, the precursor effect, the continuous effect, and the continuous big hit effect can be executed. ing. In the winning command reception process, various flags and various counters that are referred to for executing the above-mentioned various effects are set.

In the winning command receiving process, first, the winning information based on the winning command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2601). Here, the winning information includes information based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5.

Next, if it is determined whether the continuous production flag 223u is set to on (S2602) and if it is determined that the continuous production flag 223u is set to on (S2602: Yes), an additional prize is awarded. The flag 223x is set to on, and the process proceeds to S2604. On the other hand, if it is determined that the flag 223u during continuous production is not set to ON (S2602: No), the process of S2603 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2604.

When the process proceeds to S2604, it is determined whether the winning information stored this time is the winning information indicating the small hit A (S2604). Here, as shown in FIG. 11A or FIG. 15A, the small hit A is a small hit scenario a in which a small hit scenario a in which a ball is easily won by the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game is set. It is a hit type, and is a small hit type that is the target of the above-mentioned continuous production.

In the process of S2604, if it is determined that the stored winning information includes information indicating the small hit A (S2604: Yes), then it is determined whether the value is already stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o. Determine (S2608). If it is determined that the value is stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o (S2608: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o (S2608: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3 (S2609). In the process of S2609, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3 (S2609: Yes), this process ends.

In the present embodiment, when the winning information including the information indicating the small hit A is continuously received (when the small hit A is continuously won), the number of consecutive times is 2 and 3 The content of the continuous production is different depending on the case of the times. The specific small hit continuous counter 223n is a counter that counts the number of consecutive times.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the continuous effect is set to three times, a winning command including information indicating the small hit A is newly received in the state where the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 3. However, the process of adding the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not performed (S2609), but for example, when the upper limit of the continuous effect is set more than three times, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not performed. Is further added, and the continuous effect corresponding to the counter value may be executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2609, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 3, that is, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 0 to 2 (S2609: No). 1 is added to the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n (S2610), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 (S2611).

In the process of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 (S2611: Yes), the current number of reserved balls is set in the precursor effect counter 223p (S2612), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S2611, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 2, that is, the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 1 or 3 (S2611: No). This process ends as it is.

The process of S2611 is a process for determining that the winning information including the information indicating the small hit A has been continuously received (the small hit A has been continuously won), and is a specific small hit continuous counter. When the counter value of 223n is 2, it is determined that the small hit A has been continuously won. The precursor effect counter 223p set in S2612 is a winning command determined to be consecutively won in the small hit A (a prize including information indicating the second small hit A among the continuous small hits A). It is a counter that counts the order in which the reserved balls corresponding to the command) change. The precursor effect is executed until the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p reaches a predetermined value (2 in the present embodiment).

On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, the winning information stored this time is not the winning information including the information indicating the small hit A (the big hit, the miss, or the information indicating the small hit corresponding to the small hit type other than the small hit A is included. (S2604: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605).

If it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is 2 or more (S2605: Yes), then the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is stored in the small hit continuous number storage area. It is stored in 223o (S2606), the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is reset to 0 (S2607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2605, when it is determined that the counter value of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n is not 2 or more (S2605: No), the process of S2606 is skipped and the process of S2607 described above is executed. ..

In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of reserved balls to be stored is set to 8, there is a possibility that there are independently a plurality of reserved balls that are continuously won in the small hit A in the hold. Therefore, by executing the process of S2608, the variation based on the winning command in which the small hit A is continuously won is executed first, and until the value of the small hit continuous number storage area 223o is reset to 0, it is executed. Even if the winning information including the information indicating the subsequent small hit A is received, the winning information is not reflected in the production. By doing so, for example, when the precursor effect is executed based on the winning command that wins the small hit A consecutively, the winning command that wins the small hit A consecutively is generated next. Even if this is done, there is an effect that the content of the production is not changed and the player is not confused.

In the present embodiment, as described above, until the variation based on the winning command in which the small hit A is continuously won is executed, the value when the small hit A is continuously won is produced. Although it is configured so that it is not reflected in, other configurations may be adopted. For example, after the fluctuation based on the winning command in which the small hit A is continuously won is executed first, the small hit is then executed. A plurality of counter values of the specific small hit continuous counter 223n may be storable so that the effect based on the winning command in which A is continuously won is executed. By doing so, the chances of executing continuous production are increased, it is possible to provide the player with many appropriate productions corresponding to the game results, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. In the process of S2414, if the winning command has not been received (S2414: No), then it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2416). Then, when the hit-related command is received (S2416: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2417), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the hit-related processing (S2417) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this hit-related process (S2417). This hit-related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a hit-related command is received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

When the hit-related process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received (S2701). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2701: Yes), then the jackpot start effect process is executed (S2702), and this process ends. In the jackpot start effect processing, a process of setting a jackpot opening command for display and extracting information referred to when setting various display ending commands used as the effect display of the final round according to the game state is executed. To.

Here, the jackpot start effect process (S2702) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this jackpot start effect processing (S2702). This jackpot start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot opening command is received from the main control device 110. It is a process.

When the jackpot start effect process is executed, it is first determined whether the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801). This continuation flag 223q is set to be on when the lottery result of the special symbol of the first variation after the end of the big hit is a small hit A, and is based on the continuation flag 223q being set to on. , The above-mentioned jackpot continuous production is executed.

If it is determined in the process of S2801 that the continuation flag 223q is set to ON (S2801: Yes), the V gate opening timing stored in the V gate state storage area 223j is acquired (S2807), and then , The door opening timing in the small hit game of the first rotation (first variation) after the end of the big hit is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b (S2808). Then, the final round of the jackpot ends as the timing for making the fluctuation of the first rotation (first fluctuation) after the end of the jackpot into the fluctuation that can pass through V (the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the small hit game that can pass through V is executed). The timing is stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2809).

After that, the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to on (S2810), the continuation flag 223q is set to off (S2811), and the process proceeds to S2802. On the other hand, in the process of S2801 when it is determined that the continuation flag 223q is not set on (set to off) (S2801: No), the processes of S2807 to S2811 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2802. Transition.

In S2802, the jackpot opening command for display is set based on the jackpot opening command received from the main controller 110 (S2802), then the continuous production flag 223u is set to off (S2803), and the additional winning flag 223x is turned off. (S2804), and after resetting the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, the information stored in the V-passable variable storage area 223m is cleared (S2806). Then, this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the jackpot opening command has not been received (S2701: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2703). In the process of S2703, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2703: No), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2709).

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2704), and the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is added. Is a value corresponding to the final round (10 for jackpot C) (S2705).

In the process of S2705, when it is determined that the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is a value corresponding to the final round (S2705: Yes), then whether or not the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON. Determine (S2706). When it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, the final round effect command for display is set based on the game timing information. When this final round effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114, the fortune-telling effect shown in FIGS. 32 to 33 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2705, when the counter value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is not a value corresponding to the final round, and in the processing of S2706, when it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is not set to ON. (S2706: No), a display round number command is set based on the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h (S2708), and this process is terminated. Although omitted in FIG. 60, even when it is determined that the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h is one before the final round (9 for jackpot C), the continuous jackpot flag effect flag 223s is set. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON, and if the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON, the effect indicating that the Omikuji effect is executed in the final round (see FIG. 32 (a)) is the third effect. A dedicated display round number command is set so that it is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

As described above, the various display round number commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are the main processing (see FIG. 56) commands executed by the MPU 221. In the output process (S2302), it is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the current number of rounds is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol device 81 is changed depending on whether or not the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the round number command, it is possible to eliminate the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h. ..

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received in the process of S2709 (S2709: Yes), then the jackpot end effect process is executed (S2710). The jackpot end effect process is a process for setting the display content to be displayed during the jackpot ending period. For example, when the fortune telling effect (big hit continuous effect) is executed in the final round, the result of the fortune telling effect. The process of setting the effect display indicating is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 62, the jackpot end effect processing (S2710) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end effect processing (S2710). This jackpot end effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is executed when a jackpot ending command is received from the main control device 110. It is a process to be performed.

When the jackpot end effect processing is executed, it is first determined whether the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901), and when it is determined that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is not set to ON (S2901: No), the display jackpot normal ending command is set (S2902), and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the continuous jackpot effect flag 223s is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the end timing of the final round is stored in the end information storage area 223r (big hit). It is determined whether or not the first rotation (first variation) after the end is the timing at which the V-passable variation is reached (S2903). The end timing of this final round is the timing when the jackpot ending command is received. That is, it is determined whether the timing at which the process of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r.

In the process of S2903, if it is determined that the timing does not match the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r (S2903: No), the display jackpot failure ending command is set and the process proceeds to S2905, while the end information is stored. If it is determined that the timing is matched with the timing stored in the area 223r (S2903: Yes), the display jackpot success ending command is set, and the process proceeds to S2905.

When the display jackpot failure ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, Kokichi or Nakakichi is displayed as a result of the Omikuji effect on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, when the display jackpot success ending command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 displays Chokichi or Daikichi as a result of the fortune telling effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the end timing of the final round in the jackpot where the result can be arbitrarily changed (easy) by the player's game operation is stored in a predetermined condition (end information storage area 223r). It becomes possible to determine the result of the jackpot continuous production depending on whether or not it satisfies (matching the timing being set). Therefore, the player can enthusiastically participate in the game, such as intentionally shifting the end timing of the final round, and can improve the interest of the game.

Although omitted in FIG. 62, the display content displayed in the ending period of the jackpot as a result of the jackpot continuous production is not only the determination result of the end timing of the final round described above, but also the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. Is also determined based on. For example, when the timing at which the processing of S2903 is executed matches the timing stored in the end information storage area 223r, and the reserved ball contains a jackpot of a special symbol, Chokichi is selected. It is configured.

With this configuration, the result can be changed arbitrarily according to the player's game operation (easy). The end timing of the final round (first condition) in the jackpot and the player's game operation can be changed arbitrarily. The result of the jackpot continuous production can be determined depending on whether or not the lottery result (second condition) of the special symbol in the reserved ball, which is impossible (difficult), is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically participate in the game, and it is possible to display a wide variety of results as the production result of the jackpot continuous production, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Returning to FIG. 60, the description will be continued. In the process of S2709, if it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2709: No), then the small hit related process is executed (S2711). This small hit-related process is executed when a small hit is won as a result of a lottery of a special symbol and the small hit game is executed.

Here, the small hit-related process (S2711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this small hit related process (S2711). This small hit-related process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a command (small hit) related to the small hit from the main control device 110. This is the process to be executed when the opening command, small hit ending command, door passing command, V passing command) are received.

When the small hit-related process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the small hit opening command has been received (S3001). Here, if it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (S3001: Yes), the small hit start effect process is executed (S3002), and then this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the small hit start effect processing (S3002) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the small hit start effect processing (S3002). This small hit start effect process is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the small hit. A small hit opening command for display corresponding to the effect display is set, and various flags or counters referred to when executing the continuous effect are set and updated.

When the small hit start effect process is executed, first, the small hit effect pattern is selected from the small hit effect pattern selection table based on the received small hit opening command (S3101). Specifically, based on the received small hit opening command, the small hit type to be executed this time is determined, and the small hit effect pattern is selected from the small hit effect pattern selection table 222h. In the small hit effect pattern selection table 222h, as shown in FIG. 19A, in addition to the small hit type, the additional winning flag 223x, the continuous production flag 223u, and the small hit this time are small hits that can pass V. The small hit effect pattern is selected based on the determination result.

Next, a small hit opening command for display corresponding to the selected effect pattern is set (S3102), and then it is determined whether the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 1 or more (S3103). Here, if it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is smaller than 1 (S3103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous production counter 223v is 1 or more (S3103: Yes), the counter value of the continuous production counter 223v is subtracted by 1 (S3104), and then the continuous production counter 223v. It is determined whether or not the counter value of is 0 (S3105). Here, if it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is not 0 (S3105: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3105, when it is determined that the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 0 (S3105: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the continuous effect ends with this small hit, the continuous effect is in progress. The flag 223u is set to off (S3106), the additional winning flag 223x is set to off (S3107), the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is reset to 0 (S3108), and the counter value is stored in the V-passable variable storage area 223m. Clears the value (S3109) and ends this process.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S3001, when it is determined that the small hit opening command has not been received (S3001: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit ending command has been received (S3003). Here, if it is determined that the small hit ending command has been received (S3003: Yes), the small hit ending command for display is set based on the received small hit ending command (S3004), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3003, when it is determined that the small hit ending command has not been received (S3003: No), then it is determined whether or not the door passage command has been received (S3005). Here, if it is determined that the door passage command has been received (S3005: Yes), the display door passage command is set based on the received door passage command (S3006), and this process ends.

Here, when the display door passage command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the number of winnings during the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball is displayed by the voice output device 226. 2 A notification sound is output to notify that the variable winning device 650 has won a prize. In addition, based on the determination result that the small hit this time is a small hit that can pass through V, the mode of the display on the third symbol display device 81 or the notification by the voice output device 226 may be changed. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to pay attention to the effect (display, notification) during the small hit, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of S3005, when it is determined that the door passage command has not been received (S3005: No), then it is determined whether the V passage command has been received (S3007). Here, if it is determined that the V-pass command has been received (S3007: Yes), the display V-pass command is set based on the received V-pass command (S3008), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V passage command has not been received (S3007: No), this process ends.

Here, when the display V passage command is set and transmitted to the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 executes an effect display indicating that the big hit is executed after the small hit ends, and at the same time, the effect display is executed. The sound output device 226 outputs a sound congratulating the player. Even if the V-pass command for display is set, the big hit may be suddenly executed after the small hit is completed without intentionally executing the effect indicating the player to that effect. .. By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the variation display setting process (S2314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S2314). This variation display setting process (S2314) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

In the variation display setting process (S2314), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3201). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S3201: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S3207 is started. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S3201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S3202), and then the fluctuation pattern is processed in S2403 of the command determination process (see FIG. 57). The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from RAM 223 (S3203).

Then, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S3204). In the process of S3204, the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as 1st area → execution area, 2nd area → 1st area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area. After shifting the data, the variation pattern selection process is executed (S3205). Details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70.

When the processing of S3205 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S3206). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S3207). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S3207: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variation display. Finish the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S3207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S3208), and then in the process of S2406 of the command determination process (see FIG. 57), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3209).

Next, based on the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3210), and the process proceeds to S3211.

In the process of S3210, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3211). , End this process. When the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

Next, the variation pattern selection process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S3205). This variation pattern selection process (S3205) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuous production flag 223u is set to ON (S3301). Here, if it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223u is set to ON (S3301: Yes), the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is then executed (S3305), and then this process ends. The continuous effect variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 68.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, when it is determined that the continuous effect in-progress flag 223u is not set to ON (S3301: No), then it is determined whether the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than 2. S3302).

If it is determined in the processing of S3302 that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is not greater than 2 (less than or equal to 2) (S3302: No), the variation pattern is based on the variation pattern type acquired in the process of S3203. A variation pattern is selected from the selection table 222a (S3303). In the process of S3303, when the continuous production flag 223u is not set to ON and the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 2 or less, that is, the small hit A is included in the winning information stored on hold. This is a process that is executed when there is no winning information that has been won consecutively.

On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than 2 (S3302: Yes), the precursor variation pattern selection process is executed (S3304), and then this process is terminated. ..

Here, the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is set to the number of reserved balls at that time when the winning command including the information corresponding to the small hit A is received twice in succession (Fig.). See S2612 of 59). Therefore, when it is determined that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 2 at the timing when the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, the first (first) small hit A among the continuous small hits A Indicates the timing at which the fluctuation pattern based on the above is selected, that is, the timing at which continuous production becomes feasible.

Further, when the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than 2, the state before the fluctuation corresponding to the continuous small hit A is executed, that is, the winning information held and stored is continuously small. It shows a state in which the winning information that has been won is included in the winning A, and the precursor variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern that can execute the precursor effect as the variation pattern is executed.

In this embodiment, when the winning command including the information corresponding to the small hit A is received twice in succession in the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, the number of reserved balls at that time is set. However, other configurations may be used. For example, based on the number of reserved balls at the time when the condition for setting the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is satisfied, until the continuous effect becomes feasible (variation corresponding to the first small hit A among the continuous small hits A). The number of fluctuations (until the process of selecting a pattern is executed) may be set to the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, and the precursor effect may be executed until the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p becomes 0. ..

Next, the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304). This precursor variation pattern selection process (S3304) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a state in which the precursor effect can be executed (see FIG. 66). In a state where the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is larger than 2, the process for setting the precursor effect to be executed is executed.

When the precursor variation pattern selection process is executed, first, a variation pattern is selected from the precursory effect variation pattern selection table 222i based on the variation pattern type acquired by the process of S3203 of FIG. 65 (S3401). Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of S3401 has a SW effect (S3402).

Here, if it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern has a SW effect (S3402: Yes), the precursor effect is selected based on the precursor effect selection table 222d (S3403), and the SW effective time 2 is set (S3404). , S3405. The precursor effect selection table 222d defines various display modes to be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, and includes the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p, the current number of reserved balls, and the effect counter 223g. The display mode is appropriately set based on the counter value (see FIG. 17 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3402, if it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern does not have the SW effect (S3402: No), the processing of S3403 to S3404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3405, and the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p Is subtracted by 1 (S3405).

Next, if it is determined whether the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406), and if it is determined that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is 2 (S3406: Yes), then the current number of reserved balls Is greater than 6 (S3407). In the process of S3407, if it is determined that the current number of reserved balls is larger than 6 (S3407: Yes), the continuous production flag 223u is set to ON (S3408), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3406, when it is determined that the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is not 2 (S3406: No), or in the processing of S3407, the current number of reserved balls is not larger than 6 (6 or less). If it is determined (S3407: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, after the current fluctuation pattern is selected, the counter value of the precursor effect counter 223p is subtracted (S3405), and the subtracted counter value becomes 2 (S3406: Yes), that is, whether or not to turn on the continuous production flag 223u based on the current number of reserved balls when the next fluctuation is the fluctuation of the first small hit A among the continuous small hits A. I have decided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305). This continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) is a process executed in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 66) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a state in which continuous effect can be executed. This is a process for setting the continuous effect to be executed in (a state in which the continuous effect in progress flag 223u is set to ON).

Here, the outline of the process relating to the continuous effect executed in the present embodiment will be described. First, based on the winning command received from the main control device 110, the range to be continuously produced (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol and the number of small hit games) and the target period (the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the small hit game time). ) And are calculated (assumed) in advance. Next, a small hit game in which V can pass within the range targeted for continuous production and its fluctuation are determined (V-passable fluctuation determination).

Then, the continuous effect is based on the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the range subject to the continuous effect, and the determination result of the V passable variation determination. Select the effect content (variation pattern) of, and further, based on the small hit opening command received from the main control device 110, the range subject to continuous effect, and the judgment result of V passable variation determination, continuous effect. Select the content of the production during the small hit game.

By doing so, it is possible to execute a series of relevant effects for a plurality of special symbol fluctuations and small hit games.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is configured to be different according to the number of reserved balls, when the number of reserved balls changes during the continuous production execution (additional winning occurs). In this case), there is a possibility that the main control device 110 transmits a fluctuation pattern command indicating a content different from the content (variation time of the special symbol) calculated (assumed) in advance.

Therefore, if the content (variation time of the special symbol) calculated (assumed) in advance and the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 are different, it is continuous. Since there is a possibility that the production content of the production and the actual game content (V-passable fluctuation determination) may differ, the process of replacing the content of the continuous production is executed.

By doing so, the contents calculated (assumed) in advance (variation time of the special symbol) and the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 (variation time of the special symbol) are different. Even so, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a continuous production without a sense of discomfort by replacing the contents of the continuous production.

By using a configuration in which the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol does not change according to the number of reserved balls, the above-mentioned contents (assumed) calculated in advance (variation time of the special symbol) and the main control device 110 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variation pattern type (variation time of the special symbol) included in the variation pattern command received from is different.

Returning to FIG. 68, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3305) will be described. When the continuous effect variable pattern selection process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501). This continuous effect type selected flag 223w is used in this continuous effect. This flag is set to be turned on when the referenced continuous effect type is selected, and is intended to prevent the continuous effect type from being reselected during one continuous effect.

In the process of S3501, when it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is not set to ON (S3501: No), that is, when the continuous effect type referred to in the current continuous effect is not selected, The continuous effect type selection process is executed (S3502), and then the process proceeds to S3503. On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON (S3501: Yes), the process of S3502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3503.

Here, with reference to FIG. 69, the continuous effect type selection process (S3502) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this continuous effect type selection process (S3502). This continuous effect type selection process (S3502) is a process executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and each variation during the continuous effect. This is a process for setting a continuous effect type that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern corresponding to.

When the continuous production type selection process is executed, first, the value stored in the small hit continuous number storage area 223o is set in the continuous production counter 223v (S3601), and the value of the small hit continuous number storage area 223o is cleared. (S3602). After that, the V-passable fluctuation determination process is executed (S3603), and the process proceeds to S3604. The V-passable variation determination process is a process of determining a variation in which a small hit that enables V-passage is executed in each variation in which the continuous effect is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, the V passable fluctuation determination process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the V-passable fluctuation determination process (S3603). This V-passable fluctuation determination process (S3603) is a process executed in the continuous effect type selection process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the V-passable fluctuation determination process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2. (S3701). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2 (S3701: Yes), the fluctuations of this time and the next time (2 fluctuations) are based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b. The opening timing of the door 650f based on the above is acquired (S3702), and then the process proceeds to S3704.

Here, the process executed in S3702 will be described in detail. When the continuous effecting flag 223u is set to ON in S3408 of FIG. 67, the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed (S3301: Yes in FIG. 66). Then, the continuous effect type selection process is executed in the continuous effect variation pattern selection process (S3502 in FIG. 68), and the V passable variation determination process is executed in the process (S3603 in FIG. 69). This V-pass variable fluctuation determination process is a process that is executed only when the continuous effect variation pattern selection process is executed for the first time (continuous effect type that is skipped when the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to on). It is a process executed in the selection process).

Therefore, the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v determined in the process of S3701 is the value set in S3601 of FIG. 69, that is, the value indicating how many fluctuations the continuous effect of this time is performed. Become. That is, when it is determined in the processing of S3701 that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2, the continuous production of this time is an effect of being executed over two fluctuations, while in the processing of S3701, the continuous production is performed. When it is determined that the counter value of the medium counter 223v is not 2 (3), the continuous effect of this time is an effect executed over 3 fluctuations.

Therefore, in the processing of S3702, which is executed when the value of the counter 223v during continuous production is determined to be 2, in the processing of S3701, the V-passable fluctuation is determined for the fluctuation of 2 fluctuations (this time, the next time). Get the information to do. Here, in the process of S3702, the timing at which the door 650f in the small hit A is opened and the next fluctuation pattern (variation time) are acquired from the game specification storage area 222b. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) this time is extracted from the fluctuation pattern type acquired in S3203 of FIG. 65.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the next fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), it is assumed that a new winning command is not received (the number of reserved balls is not added) until the next fluctuation pattern is selected. Although it is configured to acquire the fluctuation pattern, other configurations may be adopted. For example, in addition to the configuration of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern assumed even when the number of reserved balls is added may be acquired.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3701, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is not 2 (3) (S3701: No), based on the information stored in the game specification storage area 222b, this time and The opening timing of the door 650f based on the fluctuations of the next time and the next time (3 fluctuations) is acquired (S3703), and then the process proceeds to S3704. That is, in addition to the above-described processing of S3702, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the next (third variation) is acquired from the game specification storage area 222b.

Next, in S3704, the V gate opening timing stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is acquired (S3704), and it is determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is the current fluctuation (S3705). Here, the processing executed in S3705 will be described in detail.

In the process of S3705, it is determined whether the V-passable variation is the current variation based on the information acquired in S3702 or S3703 described above and the information acquired in S3704. Specifically, from the current fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation C: fluctuation time 4 seconds) and the door 650f opening timing of the small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of the small hit A) (FIG. 17 (Fig. 17). a)) In this fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f is opened 6.5 seconds to 8 seconds after the fluctuation is started. Then, from the next fluctuation pattern (for example, special fluctuation B: fluctuation time 5.5 seconds) and the door 650f opening timing of the small hit A (2.5 seconds to 4 seconds from the start of the small hit A) (FIG. 17 (a). ), In the next fluctuation, it is calculated that the door 650f will be opened 18 seconds to 19.5 seconds after the start of this fluctuation.

Then, the period during which the door 650f is opened due to the above-mentioned current fluctuation and the next fluctuation is compared with the period during which the V gate 650d stored in the opening timing storage area 223k is opened, and each period satisfies a predetermined condition. When it is satisfied, it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is satisfied. The predetermined condition indicates a condition in which the door 650f is opened at a timing when the ball winning the door 650f can pass through the V gate 650d in consideration of the time until the ball passes through the V gate 650d. Specifically, the ball winning the door 650f is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, and the operation control of the stopper (ball stop member) 650c controls the V gate one second after the door 650f is closed. It is configured to reach 650d. Specifically, 0.5 seconds after the door 650f is closed, the stopper (ball stop member) 650c changes to the release position, so that the ball retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c starts to flow down. Then, it is configured to reach the V gate 650d after 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, when the V gate 650d is in the open state (induction state) one second after the end of the period in which the door 650f is opened, the fluctuation is determined as the V-passable fluctuation. In the present embodiment, the ball that has won the door 650f by the small hit A is retained by the stopper (ball stop member) 650c, so that the small hit A starts regardless of the timing when the door 650f is won. It is possible to reach the V gate 650d after a lapse of a certain period of time (5 seconds after the start of the small hit), and it is possible to improve the determination accuracy of the V-passable fluctuation. Therefore, by making the content of the continuous production suitable for the actual game result, it is possible to prevent the production that gives the player a sense of distrust.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the stopper 650c is provided, but the stopper 650c may not be provided. When such a configuration is adopted, when determining the V-passable variation, the opening period of the door 650f and the opening period of the V gate 650d (the period during which the door is in the guided state) are compared, and the opening period of the door 650f is determined. Of these, it is advisable to perform an effect that suggests the ratio of the period during which the ball can pass through the V gate 650d (the ratio of the period during which the winning ball can pass through the V gate 650d during the opening period of the door 650f). .. By doing so, the player can grasp the possibility (expectation degree) of passing through the V gate 650d from the content of the production, and can be happy and disappointed with the result of the game, and the player can enthusiastically play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a production that makes the person perform.

Further, by using such a configuration, the timing of reaching the V gate 650d becomes random due to the ball play of the ball winning the door 650f, so that the ball is intentionally launched so as to pass through the V gate 650d. This can make things difficult, and has the effect of providing a fair game to the player.

Returning to FIG. 70, the description will be continued. In the process of S3705, when it is determined that the V-passable variation is the current variation (S3705: Yes), "this time" is set in the V-passable variation storage area 223 m (S3706), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3705, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not the current fluctuation (S3705: No), then it is determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is the next fluctuation (S3707).

In the process of S3707, when it is determined that the V-passable variation is the next variation (S3707: Yes), "next time" is set in the V-passable variation storage area 223 m (S3708), and this process is terminated. .. On the other hand, in the process of S3707, when it is determined that the V-passable variation is not the next variation (S3707: No), "one after another" is set in the V-passable variation storage area 223 m, and this process is terminated (S3707: No). S3709). If it is determined in the processing of S3701 that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2, in the processing of S3707, if it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not the next fluctuation, the processing of S3709 is performed. This process ends without being executed.

Although not shown, if there is no variation determined to be a V-passable variation in the variation in which the continuous effect is executed, the present process is terminated without setting the V-passable variation storage area 223 m.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the special symbol variation that is a small hit that can pass V is determined by the V-passable variation determination process executed in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol. There is. That is, the V-passable variation determination process described in the present embodiment has a function of determining whether the small hit corresponding to the special figure variation executed this time can pass through V, and the winning information stored on hold. A function to determine whether there is a small hit that can pass V in (ball entry information), and if there is a small hit that can pass V, at what time (after how many rotations) the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to that small hit It has a function to determine whether it is executed.

With respect to the above-mentioned functions, one process does not have to have all, and each function may have a separate process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. When the V-passable fluctuation determination process is executed in S3603, it is next determined whether the counter value of the continuous effect counter 223v is 2 (whether the continuous effect this time is a continuous effect straddling 2 fluctuations) ( S3604). Here, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is 2 (S3604: Yes), it is based on the contents stored in the V-passable variation storage area 223m by the V-passable variation determination process described above. Then, it is determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is "this time" (S3605).

In the process of S3605, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not "this time" (S3605: No), two continuous effects B are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect type (S3606). Then, the process proceeds to S3614. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is "this time" (S3605: Yes), two continuous effects A are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect type (S3607). ), The continuation flag 223q is set to on (S3608). Then, the process proceeds to S3614.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3604, when it is determined that the counter value of the counter 223v during continuous production is not 2 (3) (S3604: No), then whether the V passable fluctuation is "this time" is determined. Determine (S3609). Here, when it is determined in the processing of S3609 that the V-passable fluctuation is "this time" (S3609: Yes), three continuous effects A are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect type (S3610). ), Set the continuation flag 223q to ON (S3608), and shift to S3614.

On the other hand, in the process of S3609, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not "this time" (S3609: No), then it is determined whether the V-passable fluctuation is "next time" (S3611). Here, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is "next time" (S3611: Yes), three continuous effects B are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect type (S3612), and the continuation flag is set. Set 223q to on (S3608) and shift to S3614. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V-passable fluctuation is not "next time" (S3611: No), three continuous effects C are selected from the continuous effect type selection table 222e as the continuous effect type (S3612), and the process proceeds to S3614. To do. Next, after executing the process of S3606 or S3608, the continuous effect type selected flag 223w is set to ON, and this process is terminated.

Although not shown, if there is no change determined to be V-passable in the fluctuation in which the continuous effect is executed, nothing is stored in the V-passable variation storage area 223 m, so the continuous effect type is selected. This process ends without doing anything.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3503, it is determined whether the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503). Here, when it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is set to ON (S3503: Yes), it changes from the continuous production fluctuation pattern selection table (additional winning) 222g based on the fluctuation pattern acquired in S3203. The pattern is selected (S3504), the SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3503, when it is determined that the additional winning flag 223x is not set to ON (S3503: No), based on the variation pattern acquired in S3203, from the continuous effect variation pattern selection table 222f, The fluctuation pattern is selected (S3505), the SW effective time 1 is set (S3506), and this process is terminated.

Although not shown, if the continuous effect type is not selected, that is, if there is no change that is determined to be V-passable in the variation in which the continuous effect is executed, the same processing as in S3303 of FIG. 66 is performed. Will be executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit) in succession, it is possible (easy) to pass the ball through the specific area. Is determined, and based on the determination result, a series of effects (continuous) can be executed using a continuous small hit period and a variable display period of a special symbol corresponding to the small hit. With this configuration, for example, the first small hit can pass the ball through a specific area (difficult), and the second small hit can pass the ball through a specific area. When it is a possible (easy) small hit, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, it is based on the fact that this small hit is an impossible (difficult) small hit to let the ball pass through a specific area. Instead of the effect, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on the next small hit being a small hit that allows the ball to pass through a specific area (easy). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the effect based on the (difficult) small hit that cannot provide the player in an advantageous game state, so that the effect that the player feels dissatisfied can be suppressed, and the game can be played. It has the effect of suppressing a situation in which a person gets tired of playing a game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2307) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2307). This frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2307) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a frame button 22 (frame left button 22a). Alternatively, it is a process of managing the time for enabling the operation of the frame right button 22b) and setting a display command when the frame button 22 is operated within the valid time.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed, it is first determined whether the switch effective time 1 is larger than 0 (S3801). Here, in the process of S3801, when it is determined that the SW effective time 1 is not larger than 0 (0), (S3801: No), then whether the SW effective time 2 is larger than 0 is determined. Determine (S3806).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3801, when it is determined that the SW effective time 1 is larger than 0 (S3801: Yes), the SW effective time 1 is subtracted by 1 (S3802), and both SWs (frame left button 22a and frame right button) are used. It is determined whether (both of 22b) is pressed (S3803). Here, when it is determined that both SWs are pressed (S3803: Yes), the display switching notice SW pressing command is set (S3804), the SW effective time 1 is reset to 0 (S3805), and this processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, in the process of S3803, if it is determined that both SWs are not pressed (S3803: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, in the process of S3806, when it is determined that the SW effective time 2 is larger than 0 (S3806: Yes), the SW effective time 2 is subtracted by 1 (S3807), and either SW (frame left button 22a or It is determined whether any of the frame right buttons 22b) is pressed (S3808). Here, when it is determined that either SW is pressed (S3808: Yes), the display addition notice SW pressing command is set (S3809), and the SW effective time 2 is reset to 0 (S3810). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3808, if it is determined that neither SW is pressed (S3808: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Further, in the process of S3806, when it is determined that the SW effective time is not larger than 0 (0) (S3806: No), this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the SW effective time 1 is configured to be set while the continuous effect is being executed, while the SW effective time 2 is set while the precursor effect is being executed. Is configured to. Therefore, since both SW effective times do not overlap, when one SW effective time is set, the processing related to the other effective time is skipped, but a plurality of SW effective times overlap. If there is a possibility that it is set, the processing of each SW effective time may be executed.

Next, the V counter update process (S2311) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this V counter update process (S2311). This V counter update process (S2311) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process executed in the V gate scenario 222c with reference to the V gate 650d. This is a process of updating the V counter 223t used for grasping the operating status of the above.

When the V counter 223t is executed, it is first determined whether or not the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901). Here, if it is determined that the V-gate scenario 222c is not set (S3901: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the V gate scenario 222c is set (S3901: Yes), then it is determined whether the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902).

If it is determined in the process of S3902 that the counter value of the V counter 223t is 5000 (S3902: Yes), the counter value of the V counter 223t is set to 1 (S3904), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3902, if it is determined that the counter value of the V counter 223t is not 5000 (S3902: No), 1 is added to the counter value of the V counter 223 (S3903), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the V-counter update process in the present embodiment, the V-gate is referred to in reference to the V-gate scenario 222c defined in accordance with the V-gate 650d in which a constant operation is repeatedly executed at 5-second intervals. When the counter value of the V counter 223t reaches 5000 (5 seconds), the counter value is added again from 1 so that the operating status of the 650d can be grasped. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of information specified in the V-gate scenario 222c.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 90. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 enables various controls for the third symbol display device 81 to be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S4001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 73) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified or complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S4102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S4102 and S4102, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S4004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 88 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 88 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 75) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)). (See S4308 in 75 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 75 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that the character ROM 234 is used, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entering (starting prize) in the first entry port 64a, the second entry opening A64b, or the second entry opening B640b. When the start instruction of the variation effect is given from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. It can be displayed and a simple fluctuation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, the power failure is restored. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S4005, the interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). FIG. 75B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, in the image controller 237, since the drawing instruction of the next image is not received at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S4302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85.

In the display setting process (S4303), one frame of images to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305), which are determined in the task process (S4304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop symbol counter, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed to shift to the process of S4304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S4403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (a). FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the processing of S4501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 is used for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S4504), set both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag to off (S4505)), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A), the display setting processing sets the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504. The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified, and at the same time The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is preliminarily stored. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variable type command (S4406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S4407), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77 (b). FIG. 77B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command (corresponding to the stop type table is determined (S4601)), the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75 (b)). ) Is executed, and the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbol is set. It is set to off (S4603), this stop type command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S4601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S4602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disengagement. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S4406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display advance notice effect command among the unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is a hit-related command (S4408: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. This hit-related command processing includes hit-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (display jackpot opening command, display round number command, display final round command, display jackpot interval command, display jackpot ending command, and display. It is a process for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command for small hit, the small hit ending command for display, the door passing command for display, and the V passing command for display).

In the hit-related command processing (S4409), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S4701), and if there is a display jackpot opening command (S4701: Yes). , The jackpot opening command process is executed (S4702), and the process proceeds to S4703.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command processing (S4702) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (a). FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command processing (S4702). This jackpot opening command process (S4702) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot opening command processing, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3001). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3002), and the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3005), the jackpot opening command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4701 (S4701: No), the process of S4702 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4703. In the processing of S4703, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S4703), and if there is a display round number command (S4703: Yes), the round number command process is executed. Then (S4704), the process proceeds to S4705.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4704) will be described with reference to FIG. 79 (b). FIG. 79B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4704). This round number command process (S4704) is for executing the process corresponding to the round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4901). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4902). Then, based on the set number of rounds display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S4903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S4905), the round number command processing is ended, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4703 (S4703: No), the process of S4704 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4705. In the processing of S4705, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4705), and if there is a final round command for display (S4705: Yes), the final round command processing is executed. Then (S4706), the process proceeds to S4707.

Here, the details of the final round command processing (S4706) will be described with reference to FIG. 80A. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the final round command processing (S4706). This final round command process (S4706) is for executing the process corresponding to the final round command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the final round command processing, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Then, based on the set final round display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5003). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5004). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5005), the final round command processing is ended, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no final display round command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S4705 (S4705: No), the processing of S4706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4707. In the processing of S4707, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4707), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S4707: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. Then (S4708), the process proceeds to S4709.

Here, the details of the jackpot interval command processing (S4708) will be described with reference to FIG. 80 (b). FIG. 80B is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing (S4708). This jackpot interval command process (S4708) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot interval command processing, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5102), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set jackpot interval display data table (S5103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5105), the jackpot interval command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S4707 (S4707: No), the processing of S4708 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4709. In the processing of S4709, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4709), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S4709: Yes), the jackpot ending command processing is executed. Then (S4710), the process proceeds to S4711.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command processing (S4710) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (a). FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command processing (S4710). This jackpot ending command process (S4710) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot ending command processing, first, the jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5202). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5204). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5205), the jackpot ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S4709 (S4709: No), the processing of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4711. In the processing of S4711, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4711), and if there is a small hit opening command for display (S4711: Yes), the small hit opening command is used. The process is executed (S4712), and the process proceeds to the process of S4713.

Here, the details of the small hit opening command processing (S4712) will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command process (S4712). This small hit opening command process (S4712) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit opening command processing, first, the small hit opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302), and the time data is set in the time counting counter 233h based on the set small hit opening display data table (S5303). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5304). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5305), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no small hit opening command for display among the new commands that have not been processed in the process of S4711 (S4711: No), the process of S4712 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4713. In the processing of S4713, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4713), and if there is a small hit ending command for display (S4713: Yes), the small hit ending command The process is executed (S4714), and the process proceeds to the process of S4715.

Here, the details of the small hit ending command processing (S4714) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process (S4714). This small hit ending command process (S4714) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit ending command processing, first, the small hit ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5402). Then, based on the set small hit ending display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5404). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5405), the small hit ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no small hit ending command for display among the new commands that have not been processed in the processing of S4713 (S4713: No), the processing of S4714 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S4715. In the processing of S4715, it is determined whether or not there is a display door passing command among the unprocessed commands (S4715), and if there is a display door passing command (S4715: Yes), the door passing command processing is executed. Then (S4716), the process proceeds to S4717.

Here, the details of the door passage command processing (S4716) will be described with reference to FIG. 82 (b). FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the door passage command process (S4716). This door passage command processing (S4716) is for executing the processing corresponding to the door passage command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the door passage command processing, first, the door passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, based on the set door passage display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5505), the door passage command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display door passage command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4715 (S4715: No), the process of S4716 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4717. In the processing of S4717, it is determined whether or not there is a display V-pass command among the unprocessed commands (S4717), and if there is a display V-pass command (S4717: Yes), V-pass command processing is executed. Then (S4718), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V-pass command processing (S4718) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the V-pass command process (S4718). This V-pass command process (S4718) is for executing the process corresponding to the V-pass command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V-pass command processing, first, the V-pass display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5602). Then, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set V passage display data table (S5603). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5605), the V-pass command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V-pass command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S4717 (S4717: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4408, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a SW-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4410), and the SW-related command is displayed. If there is (S4410: Yes), SW-related command processing is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401 processing.

Here, the details of the SW-related command processing (S4411) will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing SW-related command processing. This SW-related command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the SW-related command (both SW press command for switching display, advance notice SW press command for additional display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the SW-related command processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a switching display both SW pressing command among the unprocessed commands (S5701), and if there is a switching display both SW pressing command (S5701: Yes), In order to execute (display) both SW pressing display effects, the process proceeds to S5702.

In the process of S5702, both SW pressing display data tables corresponding to the switching display both SW pressing commands are determined, and switching is set to the display data table buffer 233d from the pointer value of the switching timing (S5702). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5703), and the process proceeds to S5704.

By the process of S5702, the notice effect can be easily set by synthesizing the double SW press display data table corresponding to the switching display double SW press command with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. be able to. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in both SW press display data tables are added to each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the switching timing. .. That is, in both SW pressing display data tables, the display contents after the switching timing are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, the display data table storage area 233b can be used more efficiently as compared with the case where addresses for all fluctuation times are prepared in both SW pressed display data tables.

In the processing of S5701, if it is determined that there is no switching display dose SW pressing command among the unprocessed commands (S5701: No), the process proceeds to S5704.

In the processing of S5704, it is determined whether or not there is an additional display advance notice SW pressing command among the unprocessed commands (S5704). In the process of S5704, if there is an additional display notice SW pressing command (S5704: Yes), the process shifts to the process of S5705 in order to execute (display) the notice SW pressing effect.

In the process of S5705, the advance notice SW press display data table corresponding to the additional display advance notice SW press command is determined, and is additionally set in the display data table buffer 233d from the current pointer value (S5705). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5706), and this process ends.

By processing S5705, the notice SW press display data table corresponding to the additional display notice SW press command is combined with the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, so that the notice SW press effect can be easily produced. Can be set. When synthesizing, the display contents specified in the notice SW press display data table are added to each address after the address (value of the pointer 233f) corresponding to the currently executed (displayed) effect. It is configured as follows. That is, in the notice SW press display data table, the display contents are defined for each elapsed time. With this configuration, it is possible to easily add and display the advance notice SW pressing effect from the time when the additional infant advance notice SW pressing command is notified.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4410, if it is determined that there is no SW-related command (S4410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S4412), and the rear image is changed. If there is a command (S4412: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S4413), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (a). FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S5801). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A, back B), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back images are turned on. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S5802), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S5801 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S5802. .. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process (S4304), when it is specified that either the back surface A or the back surface B is displayed according to the back surface type of the rear image defined in the display data table, the rear image discrimination set by S5802 is performed. From the flag, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5802, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S4412, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S4412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4414), and there is an error command. If (S4414: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to the processing of S4401.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5901). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S5902), and the error command is set. The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5901, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S5902 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process in S5902, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S4414 (S44414: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S4416), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the processing of S4401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes). ), The processing of S4402 to S4416 is executed again. Then, the processes of S4401 to S4416 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S4401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S4401: No). ), Ends this command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. In addition, the image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable video area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 86, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6001: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6002 to S6004 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6002), S6003 to S6004 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to, and all the error discrimination set to be turned on is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

In the task processing (S4304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 86. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6005.

In S6005, the pointer update process is executed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (b). FIG. 87B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6201, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6203), and if it is a demo display data table (S6203: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6203: No). S6206), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 86 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6006 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6009).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S6009: Yes), the confirmation display has not been produced yet, and it is time to produce the confirmation display. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. As such, the drawing content can be set. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4304), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S6015, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmation display flag is on (S6009: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6016). If the demo display flag is off (S6016: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S6017) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S6016, if the demo display flag is on (S6016: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image when the power is turned on ends, the image of the variation image when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table that specifies that the display is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 88 and 89, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 88A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6302), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 88 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S6301 (S6301: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 89.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (b). FIG. 88B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6401: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6402). In the process of S6402, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6402 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6402: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6403. Further, as a result of the processing of S6401, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6403.

In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data) is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6403 (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 75 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S4309 in FIG. 75 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 85) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 86 and 87) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 89) (see S6301: No in FIG. 88 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6303).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the display setting process (S4303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502), and if it is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the process proceeds to S6505.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6502: No), the processes of S6503 and S6504 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

In the process of S6506, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S6506 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6506: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6507. Further, as a result of the processing of S6505, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6505: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6507.

In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6507), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6507: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6503 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509).

If the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S6510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6512), and the process proceeds to S6513.

In the process of S6509, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to be transferred, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6509, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The discrimination in the processing of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6513 (S6513: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6515), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 (S6601). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and then the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the sprite image data is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231 and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the start address of the storage source to the final address of the storage source is read out from the character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S6602 (S6603). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 75 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball winning means (second variable winning device 650) in which the ball can win a prize. ), And within the variable ball entry means, a specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) that gives a privilege to the player when the ball passes, and a guided state in which the ball can pass through the specific area and difficulty in passing. A guiding means (V gate 650d) that can be changed at predetermined intervals is provided in a regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is continuously won, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results is configured to be in a gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. There is.

As a result, when a player wins a specific lottery result in succession, it is possible to provide a game state which is more advantageous than when a specific lottery result is won independently, and the player can be continuously specified. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to winning the lottery result can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment, when the small hit (small hit A), which is a specific lottery result, is continuously won, that is, when the specific lottery result is continuously won, the ball sets the specific area. The configuration is shown in which a small hit game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed, but if the configuration is such that the advantageous privilege game can be easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, the present embodiment is used. A configuration other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, an advantageous privilege game may be easily executed. The predetermined order is a predetermined order, such as when the specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is won a plurality of times in succession, or when the specific lottery result and the loss are alternately repeated. The specific lottery results include those that win multiple times. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the advantageous privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. Since it may be easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Further, when the small hits are continuously won, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit among the continuous small hits is the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle.

As a result, when small hits occur continuously, the continuous small hits do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game in succession, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when the small hit game is won alone, and the player wins the small hit in succession. It has the effect of suppressing the decrease in motivation for playing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the continuous small hits corresponds to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. On the other hand, the V gate 650d is configured to be different by the time (1.5 seconds) or more that the V gate is in the guided state.

As a result, among the continuous small hit games, the timing at which the ball is allowed to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game is V in the second small hit game when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state. The timing at which the ball flows down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the guided state, and when the player wins the small hit game in succession, he or she wins the small hit game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than in the case of playing, and there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing due to consecutive winning of small hits can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the time to be different is equal to or more than the time (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induced state with respect to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. .. In such a configuration, for example, when the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (5 seconds) is different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d by a time shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induction state (for example, 1 second) By winning small hits consecutively a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the operation cycle of the V gate 650d may be different by one lap (5 seconds).

With this configuration, for example, when the small hit game is consecutive five times, the small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once among the consecutively executed small hit games. There is an effect that when a player wins a small hit in succession, he / she can be provided with a more advantageous gaming state than when he / she wins a small hit alone.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small hit game, the timing for causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d with respect to the previous small hit game is the time (1.5 seconds) when the V gate 650d is in the guided state. Minutes) When the small hit games to be different are consecutive multiple times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is one cycle or more of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d. In the small hit game, the timing of letting the ball flow down to the V gate 650d can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the consecutively won small hits is executed, the consecutively won small hits are the players. It is configured to provide an advantageous gaming state for the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game in order to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Although it is shown that the number of reserved balls is 7 in the present embodiment as a predetermined condition, other conditions may be set, or the number of reserved balls satisfying the predetermined condition may be changed. Further, a requirement other than the number of reserved balls may be set as a predetermined condition. For example, a lottery result of a special symbol may be set as a predetermined lottery result, and a gaming state different from the normal one may be set as a predetermined condition. Alternatively, it may be defined as a predetermined condition that the period is between the end of the specific game state such as the jackpot game and the predetermined period (for example, the period until the change of the special symbol is executed 50 times).

Even with such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so as to satisfy a predetermined condition, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hits are continuously won, the small hits that can (easily) pass the ball through the specific area are determined, and the continuous small hit period is determined based on the determination result. A series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. With this configuration, for example, the first small hit can pass the ball through a specific area (difficult), and the second small hit can pass the ball through a specific area. When it is a possible (easy) small hit, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, it is based on the fact that this small hit is an impossible (difficult) small hit to let the ball pass through a specific area. Instead of the effect, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on the next small hit being a small hit that allows the ball to pass through a specific area (easy). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of executing the effect based on the (difficult) small hit that cannot provide the player in an advantageous game state, so that the effect that the player feels dissatisfied can be suppressed, and the game can be played. It has the effect of suppressing a situation in which a person gets tired of playing a game.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small hits executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are continuous, it is possible to provide a game state which is more advantageous than the case where the small hits are executed alone. , Based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the configuration may be such that a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone can be provided.

For example, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times which is the upper limit number of holdings and stored) It may be configured to be available. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed.

It is also more advantageous than a single small hit based on the fact that the small hits are executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits and the misses are executed alternately). It may be configured to be able to provide various gaming states. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order in combination with small hits and misses, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player even if the player loses the result of a lottery of a plurality of special symbols. It has the effect of being able to do it.

It should be noted that it is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hit and the miss are executed alternately). When a game state can be provided, the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation is the same as the special fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit (special fluctuations B to C) described in the present embodiment. A special fluctuation time may be set in, and the timing at which a plurality of small hits are executed may be configured to be different from the opening timing of the guiding means. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, there is a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, apart from the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state will be provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. effective.

In this case, it is preferable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the special variation of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation. As a result, there are cases where the small hits are continuous and cases where the small hits are executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits are executed so as to alternate between small hits and misses). It is possible to execute the same effect as the variation effect of the symbol, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, when the number of balls entered in the hold storage is 5 to 6, the fluctuation time is 5.5 seconds in the deviation pattern selection table 202c, which is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation. The special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for disconnection) is specified. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of balls entered on hold is reduced from 7 to 6 to 5, the small hit A (first time) → missed → small hit A (second time) is special. When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the deviation display (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small hit A (5.5 seconds) is executed. ) Later, the small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A and the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A is the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A of the V gate 650d. The timing differs by 2 seconds (delays by 2 seconds) with respect to the operation cycle.

In the above-mentioned example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is unified between the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the case of small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of out of order is shown. The (variation time) may be a variation pattern having a variation time that is the sum of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds). By doing so, even when the deviation fluctuation is executed between the small hits as in the above example, the time required for the small hit fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the small hit game time). ) Can be unified. Therefore, it is possible to secure the same continuous production time when the lottery result of the special symbol is in the order of small hit A → missed → small hit A and when the small hit A is won three times in a row. Therefore, there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced by standardizing the continuous effect.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous production is a small hit or a miss, it is possible to give expectations to the player until the end of the continuous production. There is.

The above-exemplified configuration shows the case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out of order, but the present invention is not limited to that. For example, the lottery result of the special symbol is not out of order and is a special variation. It may be a small hit (small hits B to C) in which B is not set. In this case, it is advisable to unify the small hit game time of the small hits B to C with the small hit A to standardize the continuous production.

Further, in the present embodiment, by setting the special fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, when the small hits are continuously executed (when the small hits are executed a plurality of times), the small hits are independently generated. It is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a door 650f (variable means) which is opened when a small hit is executed. The opening period and opening timing may be changed, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (guidance means) may be changed, or the operation timing of the stopper 650c may be changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the small hits are executed a plurality of times, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small hits becomes a small hit that can pass through V. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small hits can pass through V when the small hit is executed a plurality of times. .. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect as that of the first embodiment can be obtained.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 101. In the first embodiment described above, by providing the special fluctuations B to C as the fluctuation pattern when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is the small hit A, when the small hit A is continuously won, the small hit The opening timing of the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 opened by is such that the state of the V gate 650d provided in the second variable winning device 650 allows the ball to pass through the V discharge flow path 650e3 which is a specific region. It has a configuration in which the timing of the induction state is deviated, and when the small hit A is continuously won, the big hit via the small hit game is easily given.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a small hit type selected when a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is changed by 8 rotations after the end of the small hit game. It has a small hit D that makes it possible to select, and a small hit E that makes it possible to select a special fluctuation pattern only three times after the end of the small hit, and it is selected by winning the small hit D. As a possible special fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (1 second) is selected. Further, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d was changed from 5 seconds to 10 seconds.

By using such a configuration, it is possible to execute the operation of opening the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game a plurality of times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. Therefore, the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 can be intentionally opened at a different timing with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, and when small hits occur frequently, a big hit via a small hit game is given. It has the effect of making it easier to play and suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents in various tables stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed. This is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in that a new counter is added to the R 34 AM of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. FIG. 91A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c and the variation pattern selection table 202e are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment. ing. In addition, the numerical values set in the jackpot scenario table 2202f and the small hit scenario table 2202g have been changed.

FIG. 91B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), in the RAM 203 of the second embodiment, a special figure special fluctuation counter 203t and a normal figure special fluctuation counter 203u are added to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. ..

Next, the first small hit type selection table 202c in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (a). FIG. 92A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c in the second embodiment. The first small hit type selection table 202c has a special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 in which a small hit type different from the above-described first embodiment is defined, and a special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2. ..

FIG. 92B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 2202c1 for the special figure 1 of the second embodiment. The special figure 1 type selection table 2202c1 includes the addition of small hit D and small hit E as small hit types to the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, and various small hit types. Is different in that the value of the small hit type counter value to be set is changed, and the other configurations are the same as those of the special figure 1 type selection table 202c1 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the case of the small hit of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the small hit when the random number value is "0 to 34" in the small hit type counter C5. The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "35-40", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "41-390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number value is "391-395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number value is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

Here, among the small hit types, the “small hit D” and the “small hit E” added in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92 (b). First, when "small hit D" is selected, the door (attacker) 650f of the second variable winning device 650 is set to 0.1 during the small hit game as an opening pattern in which the ball is difficult to win the second variable winning device. An opening scenario is set in which the operation of opening seconds is performed twice, and "big hit D" is set as a jackpot type given when passing through the V discharge flow path 650e3, which is a specific area (when passing V). .. Further, after the small hit game of the small hit D is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern described later is set as the variation pattern of the special symbol is given until the variation display of the special symbol is executed eight times.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 96, but when a special fluctuation pattern is set as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 second is selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol. , It is possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol multiple times in a short time. As a result, it is possible to execute the small hit game a plurality of times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d operates, and the timing at which the door 650 of the second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game is opened is set. It can be made different with respect to the operation cycle in which the V gate 650d operates. In other words, the small hit game generated a plurality of times opens the door 650f of the second variable winning device 650 at the same timing (for example, the timing when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state) with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. It becomes possible to prevent.

With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to frequent occurrence of small hit games at a timing when V cannot pass (difficult).

When "small hit E" is selected, "big hit D" is set as the same opening pattern as the above-mentioned "small hit D" and the big hit type given when passing through V. Further, after the small hit game of the small hit E is completed, a game state in which a special variation pattern described later is set as the variation pattern of the normal symbol is given until the variation display of the normal symbol is executed three times.

The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol is set to 180 seconds in the normal gaming state (S1017 in FIG. 99), but when the special fluctuation pattern is set, 0.5 seconds is set. As a result, the normal symbol can be easily hit in the normal game state, so that the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entry device 640 can be easily opened, and the game ball can be inserted into the second ball entry port B640b. It becomes.

As a result, normally, in the normal game state in which the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are alternately held and stored by the first ball entry device 64, the game ball is inserted into the second entry port B640b. As a result, the special symbol 2 can be continuously stored on hold. In the special symbol 2, the ratio of the small hit A, which is a small hit that makes it easy for the ball to enter the second variable winning device, is set to be high with respect to the special symbol 1 (FIG. 92 (b)). c)), It is possible to provide a state in which the player can easily give a big hit via a small hit.

In the second embodiment, the contents of the operation scenarios (small hit scenarios) of the small hits A to C are different from those of the first embodiment described above. A detailed description of the operation scenario will be described later with reference to FIG. 93, but the small hit scenario a2 corresponding to the small hit A is required for the small hit game more than the small hit scenario a used in the first embodiment described above. It is stipulated that the time is shortened, and the small hit scenario b2 corresponding to the small hit B or the small hit C is required to have a shorter time for the small hit game than the small hit scenario b used in the first embodiment described above. It is stipulated.

FIG. 92 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 2202c2 for the special figure 2 of the second embodiment. The special figure 2 type selection table 2202c2 adds small hit D and small hit E as small hit types to the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, and various small hit types. Is different in that the value of the small hit type counter value to be set is changed, and the other configurations are the same as those of the special figure 2 type selection table 202c2 of the first embodiment described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. ..

As shown in FIG. 92 (c), in the case of the small hit of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the small hit when the random number value is "0 to 85" in the small hit type counter C5. The type is "small hit A". Further, when the random number value is "86 to 90", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "91-390", the small hit type is "small hit C". Further, when the random number value is "391-395", the small hit type is "small hit D". Further, when the random number value is "396 to 398", the small hit type is "small hit E".

As described above, also in the second embodiment, the ratio of selecting the small hit A, which is a small hit in which the ball is easy to win in the second variable winning device 650, is higher in the special figure 2 than in the special figure 1. It is set.

Next, the variation pattern selection table 202e according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 (a). FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e in the second embodiment. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e includes a jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e1 in which a fluctuation pattern different from that of the first embodiment described above is defined, a deviation pattern selection table 2202e2, and a small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e3. have.

A detailed description of each variation pattern table will be described later, but the variation pattern table used in the second embodiment has a special variation pattern set with respect to the variation pattern table used in the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the special variation D selected in is added and the special variations A to D cannot be selected.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot variation pattern selection table 2202e1. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e1, various jackpot fluctuation patterns are selected based on whether or not a special fluctuation pattern is set and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The special fluctuation pattern setting is given after the end of the small hit when the small hit D is selected as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, and when the special fluctuation pattern is set, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Regardless, the special variation D (1 second) is selected.

FIG. 93 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the deviation pattern selection table 2202e2. Similar to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e1 described above, the deviation pattern selection table 2202e2 is configured to select various jackpot fluctuation patterns based on the presence / absence of a special fluctuation pattern setting and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ing. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 2202e3 for small hits. Similar to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e1 described above, the small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 2202e3 is configured to select various jackpot fluctuation patterns based on the presence / absence of a special fluctuation pattern setting and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Has been done. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small hit D is won, a special change is made for a predetermined period after the end of the small hit game (until the special symbol changes eight times in the second embodiment). A pattern is set, and it is configured so that the fluctuation of the special symbol can be executed a plurality of times in a short period (a period in which the operation cycle of the V gate is once).

Therefore, the small hit game can be executed a plurality of times within a short period of time, and the ball can flow down to a specific area in the small hit game at different timings with respect to the operation cycle of the V gate.

Next, the small hit scenario table 2202 g in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 2202 g in the second embodiment. The small hit scenario table 2202 g is different from the small hit scenario table 202 g of the first embodiment described above in that the small hit scenario a202g1 is changed to the small hit scenario a2202g1 and the small hit scenario b202g2 is changed to the small hit scenario b2202g2. , And, the small hit scenario b2202g2 is defined as the selection scenario corresponding to the small hit D and the small hit E, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit scenario a2202g1 is different from the small hit scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above in that the interval between the scenarios is shortened, and the contents of each scenario are the same. The intervals between the scenarios will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b).

FIG. 95B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a2202g1. In the small hit scenario a2202g1, the opening period is shortened to 0.1 seconds with respect to the small hit scenario a202g1, and the period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is 0.1 seconds in the ending period. It has been shortened to 2.7 seconds for the entire scenario. Since the period during which the door solenoid 650f2 is set to be ON is the same as the small hit scenario a202g1 of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

By defining in this way, in the small hit game in which the small hit scenario a2202g1 is selected, the small hit game of 2.7 seconds is executed.

FIG. 95 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b2202g2. The small hit scenario b2202g2 reduces the number of times the door opens and closes by 1 to 2 times, shortens the opening period to 0.1 seconds, and out of the ending period, as compared with the small hit scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above. The period from the execution of the V passage determination to the end of the ending is shortened to 0.1 seconds. Since the other configurations are the same as the small hit scenario b202g2 of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the game time during the small hit game is 2.7 seconds for the small hit A and 2.5 seconds for the small hits B to E. Play the game. By configuring in this way, it is configured so that more special symbol variations can be executed in a short period of time.

In the second embodiment, the small hit game time is set in advance, but the game time of the small hit game may be changed according to the game state. For example, the length of the opening period and the ending period during the small hit game may be changed depending on whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d in the second embodiment and the timing of the special symbol game executed by the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 96A is a timing chart schematically showing the timing between the special symbol game and the operation of the V gate 650d when the normal fluctuation pattern in the second embodiment is selected.

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the second embodiment, the V gate 650d is variably controlled so that 10 seconds is one operation cycle. On the other hand, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the variation pattern selected when the small hit A is won is 10 seconds at the shortest (see FIG. 94). Then, when the small hit A is won, the small hit scenario a2 in which the game time is defined as 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95 (b)).

In the second embodiment configured as described above, a plurality of small hit A games are not executed within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled in the normal game state, that is, It is configured so that the sphere does not reach the V gate 650d a plurality of times within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

FIG. 96 (b) shows a special symbol when the special variation pattern in the second embodiment is selected, that is, when the small hit D is won as a result of the lottery of the special symbol and the special symbol special variation is executed. It is a timing chart which shows typically the timing of the game and the operation of the V gate 650d.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), when the small hit D is won as a result of the special symbol (special figure) lottery by the main control device 110, the special figure is executed after the small hit D game for 2.5 seconds is executed. Special fluctuations are performed. For this special figure special variation, the special variation D having a variation time of 1 second is selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (b) and FIG. 94). Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of special figure fluctuations within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the small hit A is won, the small hit scenario a2 in which the game time is defined as 2.7 seconds is set (see FIG. 95 (b)). Within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the gate 650d is variably controlled, a plurality of small hit A games can be executed.

As a result, the small hit A game is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period in which the special figure special variation is executed (in this embodiment, the period in which the special figure fluctuates eight times), so that the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is set. On the other hand, it is possible to execute a small hit game at different timings. Therefore, there is an effect that the possibility that the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit A game passes through the specific area (passage detection switch 650e5) can be increased.

In the second embodiment, one operation cycle (10) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled by enabling a plurality of small hit games to be executed within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. Within seconds), a plurality of timings for the sphere to reach the V gate 650d are provided, but even in other configurations, within one operation cycle (10 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is variably controlled. It suffices if the timing at which the ball reaches the V gate 650d can be provided a plurality of times. For example, when the ball has a plurality of small hits at different timings to reach the V gate 650d, even if the multiple small hits are not executed within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. The small hit may be set so that the timing at which the ball reaches the V gate 650d is set a plurality of times within the operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a period during which a plurality of small hits are advantageously executed (a period during which the special symbol special variation is executed) is provided based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game multiple times, it is possible to provide a more advantageous game state than when the player wins the small hit game alone, and the player wins the small hit consecutively. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing.

In the second embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D), the specific game state (special figure special variation) is set. , A specific gaming state may be set when other specific conditions are satisfied. For example, the specific gaming state may be set on the condition that the number of stored special symbols reaches the upper limit value. Further, the specific gaming state may be set on the condition that the ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the gaming area.

Further, in the second embodiment, the special figure special variation is set so as to be set for a predetermined period (8 times), but the predetermined period is not set by the number of changes of the special symbol, but the next jackpot is set. It may be configured so that the special figure special variation is set until it is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily provide the player with a jackpot game by executing the special figure special variation.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 97 to 101. First, the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 97. The timer interrupt process 2 in the second embodiment is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, as in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. It is a periodic process that is executed in.

Of the timer interrupt processing 2 in the second embodiment, in each of the processes S101, S106, S108, and S109, S101, S104, S106, and S108 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, respectively. , And the same processing as each processing of S109 is executed.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the variation of the special symbol selected in the normal gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D). It is configured so that it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state in which a variation pattern (fluctuation time) different from the pattern (fluctuation time) is selected, and in that specific gaming state, one operation cycle (10 seconds) of the V gate 650d. ), The variation pattern of the special symbol is set so that the lottery of the special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit is executed a plurality of times.

As a result, a plurality of small hit games can be executed in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d. Therefore, when a plurality of small hits are won within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d). In addition, the opening timing of the door 650f in the small hit game can be made different from the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. Therefore, since small hits occur frequently within a predetermined period, there is an effect that it is possible to easily give a gaming state (privilege) that is advantageous to the player.

In the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol is changed based on the lottery result of the special symbol. Other configurations may be used. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a predetermined lottery result, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d may be set to be longer than the normal operation cycle. With this configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of small hit games within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d) without using a configuration for changing the variation pattern of the selected special symbol. be able to.

Further, when extending the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, it is preferable to extend the period during which the V gate 650d is in the induced state (open state). As a result, the ratio of the guided state (open state) in one operation cycle of the V gate 650d can be increased, and when a plurality of small hit games are executed in one operation cycle, V It has the effect of increasing the possibility of a small hit that can be passed.

Similarly, by shortening the game time of the small hit game, a plurality of small hit games may be executed within a predetermined period (operation cycle of the V gate 650d). In this case, among the small hit games, the small hit game may be set so that the period during which the specific door 650f is closed, that is, the small hit opening period and the small hit ending period are shortened. By doing so, the time of the entire small hit game is shortened, but the time of the period during which the specific door 650f is opened (the period during which the ball can win the second specific winning opening 650a) is not changed. That is, it is possible to increase the ratio of the time that the ball can win the second specific winning opening 650a in the entire time of the small hit game, and the small hit game is executed a plurality of times within one operation cycle. In this case, there is an effect that the possibility that the small hit game that can pass through V can be executed can be increased.

Further, the second embodiment has two game states (normal game state and time-saving game state) in which the ratio of the lottery result of the special symbol to the specific lottery result (small hit D) is different, and the normal game When the lottery result of the special symbol satisfies the predetermined condition in the state (by executing the jackpot with a short time), it is configured to shift to the time-saving game state in which the probability of becoming a specific lottery result is higher than the normal game state. Has been done.

With this configuration, the player can play the game with two game characteristics, that is, a game in which a special symbol is drawn and a game in which the ball passes through a specific area. It has the effect of suppressing the situation of getting bored.

Further, in the second embodiment, two entrances (first entrance 64a and second entrance 64a) having different ratios in which the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit D) in the normal game state. Since it has a configuration (first ball entry device 64) in which balls are alternately inserted into the ball mouth A64b), is the next prize that wins "small hit A" in the normal gaming state the special figure 1? Since the degree of expectation that "small hit A" will be won consecutively changes depending on whether it is special figure 2, it is possible to provide the player with a new playability of continuously winning "small hit A". This has the effect of making it possible and improving the interest.

Further, also in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the voice lamp control device 114 executes the same control as in the first embodiment described above, but the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit D). ), And while the special variation pattern is being executed as the variation pattern of the special symbol, the special variation D (variation time 1 second) is set as the special variation pattern regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol. Therefore, in the first embodiment described above, the continuous effect is executed when the small hits are continuous, but in the second embodiment, the continuous effect is always performed during the period in which the special variation pattern is set. It may be configured to run.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. In the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the first special symbol and the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the second special symbol are obtained. , The structure is changed in the order in which the balls are entered (the order in which the balls are stored and stored) (so-called digestion in the order of entry). On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the second special symbol is prioritized over the winning information (ball winning information) based on the ball entering the first special symbol. It differs in that it uses a configuration that can be varied (so-called special figure 2 priority digestion).

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed, and it is stored in the ROM of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The contents in the various tables are changed, and the contents of the RAM of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 102, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board 13 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 102, the game board 13 of the third embodiment is different in that the first ball entry port 1064 is arranged in place of the first ball entry device 64. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The first ball entry port 1064 is a ball entry port for acquiring ball entry information of the first special symbol when the ball enters the ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105. FIG. 103 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. In the ROM 202 of the third embodiment, the values of the first random number table 202a and the first small hit type selection table 202c are changed with respect to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment.

FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a variation execution flag 203j, a variation order storage area 203k, and a special figure 2B validity period flag 203r with respect to the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first embodiment. And the validity period measurement counter 203s have been deleted.

Next, the first random number table 3202a in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 3202a. The first hit random number table 3202a is different from the first hit random number table 202a of the first embodiment described above in the value of the small hit determination value, and the first hit random number table 202a described above is different from the special figure 1. Although the same small hit determination value was specified in FIG. 2, each of the first random number tables 3202a has a different determination value.

First, the small hit determination value for the special figure 1 is "1". Therefore, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol based on the special figure 1, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to be "1/400". Next, the small hit determination value for special figure 2 is "1 to 398". Therefore, as a result of the lottery of the special symbol based on the special figure 2, the probability of becoming a small hit is set to be "398/400".

With this configuration, it is difficult to win a small hit in the lottery of special figure 1, and it is possible to easily win a small hit in the lottery of special figure 2. It is possible to make the game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which 1 is changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the first small hit type selection table 202c in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 105 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c in the third embodiment, and FIG. 105 (b) shows the contents of the special figure 1 type selection table 3202c1. It is a schematic diagram schematically shown, and FIG. 105 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection table 3202c2 for special figure 2.

As shown in FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b), in the third embodiment, the ratio at which the small hit A that is advantageous to the player is selected with respect to the first embodiment described above is set. It is lowered in the type selection table 3202c1 for special figure 1.

As described above, in the third embodiment, in the lottery based on the fluctuation of the special figure 1, both the probability of winning a small hit and the selection ratio of the small hit A when the small hit is won are both the special figures. Since the lottery is lower than the lottery based on the fluctuation of No. 2, the gaming state in which the special figure 2 is changed is configured to be a game state more advantageous to the player than the game state in which the special figure 1 is changed.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, the control process of the main control device according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 106 to 107. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 35) is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the above-described first embodiment, and the start winning process (see FIG. 106). The difference is that (see FIG. 39) has been changed to the start winning process 2 (see FIG. 107). Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 3 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the special symbol variation processing 3 in the third embodiment, the processes S271 to S274 are added to the special symbol variation processing in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S202, when it is determined that the current state is not changing (S202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is acquired (S271). Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S272).

In the process of S272, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the process proceeds to S211. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not larger than 0 (S272: No), then the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set. Acquire (S273).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S274). Here, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S274: Yes), the process proceeds to S207. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not larger than 0 (S274: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the special symbol variation processing 3 described above, when the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is larger than 0 (S272: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d (N1). ), The variation based on the special symbol 2 is executed (so-called special symbol 2 priority).

Next, the start winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start winning process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the start winning process 2 in the third embodiment, the process related to the variable order storage area 203k and the process of starting prize related to the second special symbol are changed from the start winning process in the first embodiment. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first control example are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the start winning process is executed, first, the processes S651 to S657 are executed. Since these processes are the same as S601 of the start winning process (see FIG. 39) and S701 to S706 of the special figure 1 start winning process (see FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof will be given. Omit.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second entrance (S658). In the third embodiment, since there is one ball entry port (second ball entry port) for acquiring the winning information (ball entry information) of the second special symbol when the ball enters the ball, the above-mentioned first Different from the embodiment. In the process of S658, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance (starting prize) (S658: Yes), then the processes of S659 to S663 are executed. Since the processes of S659 to S663 executed in the third embodiment are the same as the processes of S805 to S809 of the special figure 2 start winning process (see FIG. 41) in the above-described first embodiment. , The detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, after executing the process of S663, the same look-ahead process (S664) as the look-ahead process (S604) executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment described above is executed, and this process is performed. finish.

As described above, since the third embodiment uses a configuration in which the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is preferentially changed, the change based on the winning information of the special figure 2 is continuously performed. It becomes possible to execute. In the lottery based on the special figure 2, since the ratio of winning the small hit A is set higher than the lottery based on the special figure 1, it is difficult to enter the second special symbol in the game state (normal game state). And a game state (so-called time-saving game state) in which it is easy to enter the second special symbol can be set. Therefore, it is possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win the small hit A and a game state in which it is easy to win the small hit A.

In addition, in the case of using the configuration in which the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates as in the third embodiment, in order to execute the continuous effect of the first embodiment described above, the holding ball of the second special symbol is used. It may be configured to execute the process related to the continuous production only for the target. That is, in the above-described first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a configuration in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changed in the order in which the balls are entered (so-called winning order digestion), and the winning is received from the main control device 110. Since the special symbols are changed in the order of command processing, in the winning command reception processing, processing related to continuous production is performed for all winning commands (winning commands based on special symbol 1 or winning commands based on special symbol 2). It was running (see Figure 59).

However, in the third embodiment, since the configuration in which the second special symbol is preferentially changed is used, the change of the special symbol is executed in an order different from the processing order of the winning command received from the main control device 110. May be done. Therefore, when a configuration is adopted in which the variation based on one of the special symbols is preferentially executed among the plurality of special symbols as in the third embodiment, the special symbol on the side to be preferentially executed is supported. It is sufficient to execute the process related to the continuous production only for the winning command to be performed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the same continuous effect as in the first embodiment described above.

Further, in the third embodiment, a normal game state (see FIG. 104) in which it is difficult to win a small hit in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is mainly executed, and a second special symbol (special diagram 2). ) Has a time-saving game state (see FIG. 104) in which it is easy to win a small hit, in which the lottery is mainly executed. Furthermore, by winning consecutive small hits, a specific area (second variable winning prize) is obtained. The passage detection switch 650e5) provided in the device 650 is configured to be able to provide a small hit game in which the ball easily passes.

As a result, in the normal game state, the small hit game is suppressed from being frequently executed, and in the time-saving game state in which the small hit game is frequently executed, the small hit game is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game multiple times, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when the player wins the small hit game alone, and the player wins the small hit consecutively. This has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation for playing. In addition, the configuration of the special figure special variation used in the above-described second embodiment may be used in the third embodiment.

<About Modification 1 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification 1 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first modification, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed with respect to the third embodiment described above. In the first modification, the second ball-entry device 1640 is arranged below the first ball-entry port 1064, and the second variable winning device 650 is arranged below the second ball-entry device 640. It differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right sides of the board 13. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The second ball entry device 1640 used in the first modification is provided with a second ball entry port 1640b (not shown) to which an electric accessory 1640a (not shown) is attached. The electric accessory 1640a differs from the electric accessory 640a described above in that it has two movable pieces (a right movable piece and a left movable piece) that are driven when the opening operation is executed, and the other configurations are as follows. Since it is the same as the second ball entry device 640 used in the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

According to the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the present modification 1, even when a game (normal game) aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 is performed, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67, and the ball can be passed through the through gate 67. It is configured so that the ball can be entered into the second ball entry device 640 even when the normal game is being executed.

With this configuration, for example, in the normal game state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the lottery of the normal symbol is executed. Then, if a winner is won by a lottery of a normal symbol, the electric accessory 1640a attached to the second ball entry device 640 is opened, and a ball is entered into the second entry port 1640b of the second entry device 1640 (starting prize). ) Is possible.

Further, in the present modification 1, since the configuration is such that the second special symbol is preferentially changed as in the third embodiment described above, the second special symbol is continuously changed in the normal gaming state in the gaming state. Can be provided. Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the ratio of winning the small hit A is set higher than that of the lottery of the first special symbol. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning consecutively winning A.

As a result, even if the game state is the normal game state, by winning the prize in the lottery of the normal symbol, the player is provided with a game that increases the possibility of winning the small hit A consecutively. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the present modification 1, the second variable winning device 650, which is in an open state in which the ball can be won when a small hit is won, is arranged in the lower center of the game board 13. By performing a game (normal game) aiming at the left side area of the game board 13, the ball can reach the second variable winning device 650.

As a result, even if a small hit is won, the player does not have to play a right-handed game. Further, when the small hit game is executed, it is not necessary to notify the player to the right-handed game by the third symbol display device 81 or the like. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the small hit has been won, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to winning a plurality of small hits.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the present modification 1 may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, or may be changed to various controls executed in the third embodiment. Various controls executed in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be applied.

<About Modification 2 in the Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a front view showing the game board 13 in the second modification. In the second modification, the board surface configuration of the game board 13 is changed with respect to the third embodiment described above. In the second modification, the winning unit 710 (see FIG. 110) having the third variable winning device 700 is arranged in the right region of the game board 13, and the first variable winning device 65 is arranged below the winning unit 710. However, it differs from the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the third embodiment in that the second ball entry device 640 is arranged on the downstream side thereof. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same configurations as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the outline of the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 110. FIG. 110 is a front view schematically showing the internal structure of the winning unit 710. FIG. 110 schematically shows only the main structure with the cover member removed in order to explain the internal structure of the winning unit 710.

First, as shown in FIG. 109, most of the game balls that have entered the right region of the game board 13 pass through the opening 710a of the winning unit 710. As shown in FIG. 110, the winning unit 710 plays a game with a first flow path 711a having a first discharge port 711 for discharging a ball passing through the opening 710a onto the game board 13 and a ball passing through the opening 710a. It has a second flow-down path 712a having a second discharge port 712 for discharging onto the board 13, and a third variable winning device 700 configured so that a ball flowing down the second flow-down path 712a can win a prize. A sphere that has passed through the opening 710a flows down each path based on the operation of the opening / closing member 700b (see FIG. 110) of the third variable winning device 700.

The third variable winning device 700 is configured so that the ball can enter when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing member 700b is operated to operate the third variable winning device 700b. 3 The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 of the variable winning device 700 are variable so that the ball can win a prize, respectively. The ball that has won the third variable winning device 700 is configured to pass through a specific area (passage detection switch 700c2) provided in the third variable winning device 700 or a normal discharge path 703.

Further, the present modification 2 is different from the above-described third embodiment in that a fluctuation time of 1 second is set as a fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (shown). Z).

Next, the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. The opening 710a of the winning unit 710 is an opening having an opening width equivalent to that of one ball, and is formed at a position where most of the balls fired in the right region of the game board 13 pass. A second opening / closing member 700b3 is provided at a position below the opening 710a (a position where a sphere that has passed through the opening 710a reaches). The second opening / closing member 700b3 switches the state of the path of the first flow path 711a between a state in which the ball can pass through the first flow path 711a (open state) or a state in which the ball is difficult to pass (closed state). It is configured to be variable.

The second opening / closing member 700b3 is configured to follow the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 700b described later, and the second opening / closing member 700b4 transmits the operation of the opening / closing member 700b opened / closed by the opening / closing solenoid 700g. The 700b3 is configured to be movable back and forth. The second opening / closing member 700b3 is composed of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board side, and in the closed state, the first flow path 711a is completely covered by the second opening / closing member 700b3. The upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 has an inclined surface on which the sphere flows down to the second flow path 712a side (left side in the front view of FIG. 110) in the closed state.

Here, a mechanism for opening and closing the second opening / closing member 700b3 will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 (a) is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710 in a state where the second opening / closing member 700b3 is closed (a state when the small hit game is not executed), and FIG. 111 (b) is a plan view schematically showing the winning unit 710. FIG. 5 is a plan view schematically showing a winning unit 710 in a state in which the second opening / closing member 700b3 is open (a state in which a small hit game is executed).

As shown in FIG. 111A, the opening / closing member 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the opening / closing member solenoid 700g, and the opening / closing member solenoid 700g is off. In the state, the opening / closing member 700b is located in a state of protruding forward of the game board 13 (the state shown in FIG. 111A), and when the opening / closing member drive solenoid 700g is set to ON, the opening / closing member 700b is set to the game board. It is configured to be located in the rearward retracted state of 13 (the state shown in FIG. 111B).

Of the opening / closing member 700b, a plurality of protrusions are provided on one end side (the side facing the second opening / closing member) of the first opening / closing member 700b2. Then, a transmission member 700b4 having an engaging portion with which the plurality of protrusions can be engaged is provided. The transmission member 700b4 is rotatably supported with respect to the winning unit 710. Further, the second opening / closing member 700b3 is provided with a plurality of protrusions on one end side (the side facing the opening / closing member), and is provided at a position where the protrusions and the transmission member 700b4 described above engage with each other.

Here, the action of changing the second opening / closing member 700b3 with the operation of the opening / closing member 700b will be described with reference to FIG. 111. For example, when the opening / closing member 700b is variable from the protruding state (the state shown in FIG. 111A) to the retracted state (the state shown in FIG. 111B), it is transmitted as the opening / closing member 700b moves. The member 700b4 rotates (rotates clockwise when viewed from the viewpoint of FIG. 111). As the transmission member 700b4 rotates, the second opening / closing member 700b3 that engages with the transmission member 700b4 moves in a direction that projects toward the front surface side of the game board 13. That is, the opening / closing member 700b and the second opening / closing member 700b3 are at opposite positions due to the drive of the opening / closing member drive solenoid 700g, which is one drive source, that is, when the opening / closing member 700b protrudes, the second opening / closing member 700b3 retracts. The transmission member 700b4 is mechanically configured so that the second opening / closing member 700b3 protrudes when the opening / closing member 700b retracts.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 110. In the second flow path 712a in which the ball flowing down the upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 is guided, the inlet and outlet portions of the flow path are formed by the upper surface of the opening / closing member 700b, and the detour circuit 710b between them is formed. It is configured.

The detour 710b is a passage provided for extending the flow time of the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a (decreasing the flow speed), and the time for the ball to pass through the second flow path 712a is 2 Designed to be seconds. During this time, when the small hits are continuously won, the ball that has passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small hit enters the second opening 700a2 during the later executed small hit. It is the time when the ball becomes possible.

That is, in the present modification 2, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol whose lottery result is a small hit is 1 second, when a continuous small hit is won, the second flow path is performed during the previously executed small hit. A ball that has passed through 712a (entered the second flow path 712a during the ending period in the small hit (see FIG. 15B)) has a special symbol variation time (1 second) corresponding to the small hit and during the small hit. After the opening period (0.1 seconds) of, the ball can enter the second opening 700a2.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the ball passing time of the second flow path 712a are not limited to the time set in this modified example, and when the small hits are continuously won. , The ball that entered the second flow path 712a during the previous small hit (the ball that reached the third variable winning device 700 at the timing when the opening / closing member 700b is closed during the small hit (during the small hit ending)) It suffices if the time during which the third variable winning device 700 can be won in the later small hit is set. For example, if the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit is set to 4 seconds and the opening period during the small hit is set to 1 second, the ball passing time of the second flow path 712a is 5.5. It may be set as seconds (a time obtained by adding a fluctuation time of 4 seconds, an opening period of 1 second, and a part of the ending time (0.5 seconds) during the previous small hit).

Here, the second flow path 712a will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a). As described above, the inlet portion and the outlet portion of the second flow path 712a are formed by the opening / closing member 700b, and as shown in FIG. 111A, when the opening / closing member 700b is located at the protruding position, the sphere is formed. It is configured as a flowable route. In this state, the sphere that has flowed down the upper surface of the first opening / closing portion 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b flows down to the detour 710b.

The detour 710b is configured as a path through which the sphere flows down in a meandering manner by the first side wall 710b1, the second side wall 710b2, the third side wall 710b3, and the bottom surface member. Hereinafter, a specific configuration of the detour circuit 710b will be described. In principle, the words and phrases used in the specific description indicate the direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. The sphere that has entered the second flow path 712a first collides with the right side surface (right side from the viewpoint of FIG. 111) of the first side wall 710b1. The bottom surface on which the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 is arranged is inclined toward the back of the game board 13 (upward from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right side surface of the first side wall 710b1 is It flows down toward the back of the game board 13 and collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2. The bottom surface where the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 is arranged is inclined to the left side of the game board 13 (left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 111), and the ball that collides with the right end side of the second side wall 710b2 is the game board. The flow path on the back side flows down toward the left side of the game board 13. As described above, the detour circuit 710b used in the present embodiment is configured so that the flow direction of the sphere is changed to be substantially right angles by the inclination of the bottom surface portion and each side wall, so that the flow (rolling) of the sphere is performed. It is possible to set a long distance.

The detour 710b may be configured by using a configuration other than the configuration of the detour 710b described above. For example, the bottom surface of the detour 710b is inclined downward to the left (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 111) 1. It may be composed of one member, and each side wall may be configured to have an obtuse angle with respect to the flow direction of the sphere. With this configuration, the flow (rolling distance) of the sphere cannot be set as long as the configuration of the detour circuit 710b used in the present embodiment, but the configuration of the detour circuit 710b can be simplified. It will be possible.

The configuration of the detour circuit 710b described above may be appropriately selected according to the space for arranging the detour circuit 710b and the required flow (rolling) distance of the sphere.

The ball that has flowed down the detour circuit 710b flows down the upper surface of the second opening / closing member 700b3 of the opening / closing member 700b that constitutes the outlet of the second flow path 712a, passes through the second discharge port 712 (see FIG. 110), and plays a game. It is discharged to the board 13.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 110. The first opening / closing portion 700b1 forming the inlet portion of the second flow path 712a is designed to have a shorter opening width (distance from which the ball flows down) than the second opening / closing portion 700b2 forming the outlet portion. The first opening / closing portion 700b1 is designed to have an opening width of 15 mm, and the second opening / closing portion 700b2 is designed to have an opening width of 45 mm.

With this configuration, the number of spheres rolling on the upper surface of the second opening / closing portion 700b2 of the opening / closing member 700b is larger than the number of spheres rolling on the upper surface of the first opening / closing portion 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b. be able to. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 700b is opened at a high speed (for example, 0.2 seconds), the second opening 700a2 covered by the second opening / closing portion 700b2 is more than the first opening 700a1 covered by the first opening / closing portion 700b1. The opening makes it easier for the ball to win a prize.

Next, the structure of the third variable winning device 700 provided in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIG. 110. As described above, the third variable winning device 700 has two openings (first opening 700a1 and second opening 700a2), and the game board 13 is provided by the opening / closing member drive solenoid 700 g (see FIG. 111). The opening / closing member 700b that can be changed in the front-rear direction is configured to be variably configured into an open state in which the ball can pass through the two openings and a closed state in which the ball cannot pass (difficult).

The first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2 use a configuration that can be changed between an open state and a closed state by one opening / closing member 700b, and the two openings can be changed between an open state and a closed state at the same timing. Will be done. Of the opening / closing members 700b, the portions (first opening / closing portion 700b1 and second opening / closing portion 700b2) that cover the respective openings are configured to have different lengths in the front-rear direction of the game board 13, and the opening / closing member 700b The timing at which each opening changes between the open state and the closed state may be different depending on the operation.

For example, the first opening / closing portion 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b covering the first opening 700a1 is made longer (protruding in the front-rear direction of the game board 13) than the second opening / closing portion 700b2 of the opening / closing member 700b covering the second opening 700a2. Designed to delay the timing at which the first opening 700a1 changes from the closed state to the open state (the state in which the opening is not covered by the opening / closing member) rather than the second opening 700a2, and closes from the open state. The timing of changing to the state may be accelerated.

With this configuration, the period in which the first opening 700a1 is open is shorter than that of the second opening 700a2, so that the ease of winning each opening can be made different. There is.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 110. The ball winning from the first opening 700a1 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f1 and is configured to flow down the first winning path 700d1 and reach the V gate 700c1. The first winning route 700d1 is configured so that the passing time of the ball is about 1 second.

Next, the ball winning from the second opening 700a2 of the third variable winning device 700 is detected by the detection switch 700f2, flows down the second winning path 700d2, and then reaches the V gate 700c1. .. Further, in order to reliably detect the winning ball from the second opening 700a2 with the detection switch 700f2, specifically, the ball passage width of the ball is narrowed from the second opening 700a2 toward the detection switch 700f2. The opening width (about 45 mm) of the second opening 700a2 is configured to be the ball passing width (13 mm) of the detection switch 700f2. Further, the second winning route 700d2 is configured so that the passing time of the ball is about 0.3 seconds.

Further, the first winning path 700d1 and the second winning path 700d2 described above are configured to merge on the V gate 700c1 in the third variable winning device 700.

Like the V gate 650d of the first embodiment described above, the V gate 700c1 is configured to be variably configured into an induction state and a regulation state at a constant cycle after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. Since the detailed configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The sphere that has reached the top of the V gate 700c1 passes through the specific region (detection switch 700c2) in the V discharge path 704 if the V gate 700c1 is in the guided state (a state in which it can pass through the specific region of the V discharge path). It is collected at the collection port. If the V gate 700c1 is in a regulated state (cannot pass through a specific area of the V discharge path (difficult)), it rolls on the V gate 700c1, passes through the normal discharge path 703, and is collected at the collection port. ..

In the third variable winning device 700 configured in this way, when consecutive small hits are won, the first opening 700a1 and the second opening are the small hits to be executed later in the continuous small hits. A ball can enter from both 700a2 and 700a2. Further, since the time to reach the V gate 700c1 is different between the ball entered from the first opening 700a1 and the ball entered from the second opening 700a2, the ball entered from one of the openings. It is possible to increase the possibility that the sphere will pass through the V gate 700c1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more advantageous gaming state when the small hits are continuously won than when the small hits are won alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to consecutively winning small hits.

The configuration of the winning unit 710 has been described above with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. Next, the ball flow in the winning unit 710 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a ball flow according to an operating state (closed state or open state) of the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 included in the winning unit 710.

As shown in FIG. 112, in the state where the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the first flow path (discharge path) 711a of the second opening / closing member 700b3 makes a ball. The ball is in an open state so that it can pass through, and the ball that has entered the winning unit 710 passes through the first flow path (discharge path) 711a and is discharged to the game board 13.

Further, in the state where the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is closed (closed state), the ball flowing down on the first opening / closing part (front door) 700b1 flows down to the detour 710b. .. Then, the ball that has passed through the detour 710b flows down the upper surface of the second opening / closing portion 700b2 and is discharged from the second discharge port 712 to the game board 13.

Next, in the state where the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the third variable winning device 700 is open (open state), the first flow path (discharge path) 711a of the second opening / closing member (guide plate) 700b3 is a ball. The ball that has entered the winning unit 710 in a closed state that cannot pass through flows down on the second opening / closing member (guide plate) 700b3 toward the first opening 700a1 side of the third variable winning device 700.

Since the opening / closing member (door) 700b of the ball that has flowed down to the first opening 700a1 side is in the open state, the first opening 700a1 is awarded. A ball that has passed through the detour 710b also wins a prize in the second opening 700a2.

As described above, in the third variable winning device 700 used in the second modification, the ball that could not win the prize from the first opening 700a1 flows down the detour 710b, and the next small hit causes the third variable winning device 700. Since the 3 variable winning device 700 is opened again, the ball flowing down the detour 710b can win a prize from the second opening 700a2. With this configuration, if small hits occur frequently so that the third variable winning device 700 is continuously opened, the ball flows down to both the first opening 700a1 and the second opening 700a2. Therefore, even if it is a small hit that opens at high speed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will win the third variable winning device 700.

The difference between the ball passing time of the first winning route 700d1 (about 1 second) and the ball passing time of the second winning route 700d2 (about 0.3 seconds) is set within the period during which the V gate 700c1 is in the guided state. The difference should be. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that a sphere that has passed through either the first winning path 700d1 or the second winning path 700d2 will pass through the V gate 700c1 while the V gate 700c1 is in the guided state. This has the effect of being able to provide a more advantageous gaming state to the player.

Further, since the opening width of the second opening is longer than the opening width of the first opening, the second opening is larger than the first opening to the third variable winning device 700. Has a structure that makes it easy to win a prize. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the third variable winning device 700 when the small hits are continuous.

Further, in the normal gaming state in which the third variable winning device 700 does not operate, the opening / closing member 700b is in the closed state and the second opening / closing member 700b3 is in the open state. The game ball flows down the first flow path 711a, and is discharged from the first discharge port 711 to the lower right region side of the game board 13.

Therefore, in a game state other than the small hit game, it is suppressed (prohibited) that the ball launched by the player into the right region of the game board 13 flows down the second flow path 712a of the winning unit 710. Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in a game state other than the small hit game (for example, a big hit game state), the situation in which the ball flows down the second flow path 712a and delays the flow time is suppressed ( It has the effect of being able to (prohibit).

Further, even if the right-handed game is performed in advance before the small hit game is executed, the ball does not flow down the second flow path 712a, so that the second opening 700a2 is opened in the first small hit game. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent a game such as passing through from being executed.

Further, in the present modification 2, the ball winning from the second opening 700a2 flows down to the V gate 700c1 rather than the first winning path 700d1 in which the ball winning from the first opening 700a1 flows down to the V gate 700c1. It is configured so that the passing time of the winning route 700d2 is shortened. Therefore, the ball that has won the third variable winning device 700 can flow down to the V gate 700c1 at different timings depending on the winning opening, and the player is given a big hit in the small hit game. You can entertain whether or not.

In addition, for example, by configuring the period in which the V gate 700c1 is open to be 0.5 seconds after the small hit game is executed, only the ball winning from the second opening 700a2 is in the specific area ( It may be configured so that it can pass through the passage detection switch 700c2). With this configuration, small hits are continuously executed, and the ball can pass through the second opening 700a2 so that the ball can pass through the V gate 700c1.

Further, in the third variable winning device 700 used in the present modification 2, in order to make the device compact, as shown in FIG. 110 or 111, the first opening / closing portion 700b1 of the opening / closing member 700b and the second opening / closing member 700b The distance from the 700b3 is not equal to one sphere. For example, the distance between the first opening / closing portion 700b1 and the second opening / closing member 700b3 of the opening / closing member 700b is formed to be the interval of several spheres. The interval may be configured to be covered with a guide plate capable of rolling the ball from the second opening / closing member 700b3 toward the opening / closing member 700b.

By doing so, during the small hit game, a plurality of balls rolling on the second opening / closing member while the opening / closing member 700b is open (the second opening / closing member is closed). It is possible to flow down the opening / closing member 700b in a state where the opening / closing member 700b is closed (a state in which the second opening / closing member is open).

Further, in the second modification, two openings (first opening 700a1 and second opening 700a2) are provided as ball-entry means for inserting the ball into the third variable winning device 700. The unit may be configured as one. In this case, the second flow path 712a is configured so that the ball that does not enter the opening due to the small hit that is executed first among the continuous small hits enters the opening at the small hit that is executed later. Just do it. In this case, the retention means (stopper, magnet, etc.) for retaining the ball for a predetermined time (1 second in this modification 2) until the next small hit is executed by the second flow path 712a flowing down the ball. It is preferable to have a configuration having.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the small hits are continuously executed, it is possible to provide a gaming state which is more advantageous than the case where the small hits to be executed later are won by the small hits alone. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to consecutively winning small hits.

In addition, when a continuous small hit is won, the second flow path 712a is passed through the second flow path 712a during the previously executed small hit (during the ending period in the small hit (see FIG. 15B)). A detour (guidance means) is provided to allow the ball (invading) to enter the second opening 700a2 during the small hit executed after the fluctuation time (1 second) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably provide a game state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit to be executed later is won by itself. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to consecutively winning small hits.

Further, in the present modification 2, the small hit can be executed a plurality of times at intervals shorter than the operation cycle of the V gate 700c1 which is the guiding means. Therefore, for example, when a small hit is won three times in a row, by providing a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter in the small hits (second and third times) executed later, in any of the small hits. When the V gate 700c1 is in the guided state, the ball can be entered into the third variable winning device, and the small hit that is executed later more reliably is a game that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is won alone. It is possible to provide a state, and there is an effect that a decrease in motivation for playing due to consecutive winning of small hits can be suppressed.

In the second modification, the operation of the V gate 700c1 is constantly controlled at a constant cycle. For example, the opening operation of the V gate 700c1 is performed after a small hit is executed (third variable winning device). It may be configured to execute for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the opening / closing member 700b of 700 is opened. By doing so, it is possible to make the ball flowing down the second flow path 712a win a prize in the third variable winning device 700 immediately after the subsequent small hit in the case where the small hit is continuously won. It will be possible. Therefore, in the case where the small hits are continuously executed, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hits to be executed later are won by the small hits alone. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation to play due to consecutively winning small hits.

In the second modification described above, the second flow distance of the ball is extended by using the meandering detour 710b as the flow period extension means for extending the flow period of the ball in the second flow path 712a. Although the flow-down period of the flow-down path 712a is extended, a croon structure in which the ball flows down while orbiting the ball may be used as another configuration for extending the flow-down distance of the ball.

Further, as a method for extending the flow period of the sphere, a configuration for reducing the flow speed of the sphere may be used as a method other than the method for extending the flow distance of the sphere. In such a configuration, for example, as a member capable of reducing the flow velocity of the sphere due to the friction generated between the objects, at least one part of the second flow path 712a is made of a material having a high friction coefficient (urethane rubber or the like). You may use a configuration that reduces the flow velocity of the sphere by forming the ball, and further, by roughly forming the ball rolling surface of the second flow path 712a or providing a protrusion, the space between the objects (the first). 2 The frictional force between the flow path 712a and the ball) may be increased to reduce the flow speed of the ball.

Even if such a configuration is used, the same effect can be obtained. In order to extend the flow period during which the sphere flows down the second flow path 712a, both the above-mentioned flow distance extending means for extending the flow distance and the flow speed reducing means for reducing the flow speed of the sphere may be used. Good.

The board surface configuration of the game board 13 used in the present modification 1 may be applied to the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above, or may be changed to various controls executed in the third embodiment. Various controls executed in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above may be applied.

In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the main control device 110 performs output processing based on various determination processes, but all the output information is the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261. Also, when the determination process is performed by a device other than the main control device 110, all the information based on the determination result is output to the audio lamp control device 113 or the external output terminal board 261. It is configured to be possible. Further, the output information can be identifiable and notified to the outside, and as a means for performing the notification, various devices (LCD, speaker, etc.) connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the main control device 110 are directly notified. There is a connected display unit, etc.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly known as a probabilistic machine) that shifts to a high-probability gaming state in which the jackpot probability becomes higher than usual. In this case, a method of continuing the high-probability gaming state that shifts after the big hit until the next big hit, a method of continuing until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a method of continuing each time the special symbol changes. A method is conceivable in which a lottery for transitioning from the high-probability gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed, and if the lottery is won, the transition to the normal gaming state is conceivable, and any pachinko machine may be used. In addition, when the game shifts to the high-probability gaming state, in addition to the high probability of jackpot, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is high. It may be implemented in a pachinko machine that is shortened or changes the variable pattern of the variable ball entry means that is variable when a winning prize is won in a lottery of ordinary symbols. In addition, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area, and two special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2). ) May be changed at the same time, and the lottery of the other special symbol may be invalidated or interrupted based on the lottery result of one of the special symbols. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Each of the above embodiments and modifications may be combined in whole or in part. Further, although it is composed of sub-control devices such as the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the functions may be integrated into the main control device 110.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Advantages of multiple small hits)
A discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination means after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time. A dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the player, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific judgment result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. A privileged game executing means for executing a game, a specific area through which a ball can pass when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the privileged game is executed by the privileged game executing means, and a specific area where the ball has passed. In this case, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player and a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that at least one of the privileged games to be executed has a setting means for setting the privileged game to be executed so that the ball can pass through the specific area.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device opened by a privilege game (small hit game, etc.) and a specific area provided in the variable winning device in which a big hit game is executed by passing a ball. A means for repeatedly controlling the guiding member for guiding the sphere to the specific region, a mode in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region, and a mode in which the sphere does not easily pass through the specific region are provided at regular intervals. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which the opening operation of a variable winning device based on a small hit game and the control operation of a guiding member are made independent to randomly generate a big hit game in a specific small hit game (for example, special pachinko machine). Open 2011-206309 (Ab. 2011). In this case, since the timing at which the variable winning device opens due to the small hit game and the timing at which the mode of the guiding member changes are independent and independent, at what timing the ball wins the prize in the variable winning device. However, it is possible to provide the possibility that the big hit game is executed, but when the small hit game is won multiple times, the game becomes monotonous because there is no advantage to the player, and the player's willingness to play is increased. There was a problem that it would decrease. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

According to the gaming machine A1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times while satisfying a predetermined specific condition, at least one of the privilege games executed a plurality of times by the setting means is said to be the privilege game. Is set so that the sphere can pass through the specific area. As a result, it is possible to provide a player in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

The gaming machine A1 has a variable ball entry means that changes from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter, based on the execution of the privilege game, and the variable ball entry means thereof. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that the specific area is provided in the means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a specific area is provided inside the variable ball that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game. As a result, it is possible to execute a game aiming at a specific area only when the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play when the privilege game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A2, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means and capable of being variable between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area, and its variable. It has a variable control means that alternately changes the means into the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable means is changed to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the variable control means variably controls the variable means into an advantageous state in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region and a disadvantageous state in which the sphere is difficult to pass, and the variable means becomes an advantageous state, the sphere can pass through the specific region. Predetermined conditions are satisfied. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the privilege game is executed and the ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass through the specific area, so that the difficulty level of the ball passing through the specific area is increased. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

A4 of the gaming machine A3, wherein the variable control means is variably controlled so that the variable means is repeatedly changed between the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means into an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means becomes the advantageous state is randomized with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. Is possible. Therefore, no matter when the ball enters the variable ball entry means, the ball may pass through a specific area, so that there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

The gaming machine A5, wherein in any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific condition is satisfied when the privileged games are executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a specific condition is satisfied when a plurality of privileged games are executed in a predetermined order, a new game property is provided in which a player is provided with an advantageous state based on a plurality of determination results by the determination means. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The case where the award games are executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order means that the award games are executed a plurality of times in succession, and the result of the determination by the determination means while the award game is executed. The combinations in which are out of order may be in a predetermined order. By doing so, even if the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means is wrong, there is a possibility that a favorable state is provided to the player, so that the player can always have expectations. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine A5, the predetermined order is the gaming machine A6, wherein the privileged games are continuously executed.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the specific condition is satisfied by the continuous execution of the privilege game, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area when the privilege game is won, the privilege game is won again next time. For example, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area. When a privileged game is won multiple times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, an entry means capable of entering a ball, an entry information acquisition means for acquiring entry information based on the entry of the ball into the entry means, and a ball entry information acquisition means thereof. It has a storage means in which a plurality of ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means is stored at least until the determination condition is satisfied, and further has a second specific condition as the specific condition, and the second specific condition is further provided. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the condition is satisfied when a predetermined number or more of the ball entry information is stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a plurality of ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means based on the ball entering the ball entry means is stored in the storage means until the determination condition is satisfied. The second specific condition is satisfied when a predetermined number or more of ball entry information is stored in the storage means. This makes it possible to encourage the player to play the game in order to store a plurality of ball entry information in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the variable control means has the variable control means, with the third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is obtained and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is obtained, as one operation period. The means is variably controlled, the setting means has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means is said. When the award game is executed a plurality of times, the award game of 1 and any of the other award games are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. The gaming machine A8 is characterized by having a special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to a game.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with the third period, which is a combination of the first period in the advantageous state and the second period in the disadvantageous state, as one operation period. Then, the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game is set by the dynamic display period setting means. Further, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting means, the privilege game of 1 and any of the other privilege games are performed at different timings for one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set to be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to set the privilege game that can pass through the specific area and the privilege game that is difficult to pass through the specific area according to the dynamic display period to be executed. Therefore, the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced as compared with the case of setting a privilege game that can pass through a specific area and a privilege game that is difficult to pass through a specific area by controlling the operation of the variable means or the variable ball entry means. It has the effect of being able to.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine A6, among the privileged games executed continuously, the privileged game to be executed first (the first privileged game (corresponding to any other privileged game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privileged game (the second privileged game (corresponding to the first privileged game)) is different. That is, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game to the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games executed continuously is set to one operation period of the variable means. On the other hand, it can be different. As a result, since the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game process can be reduced.

In the configuration without the gaming machine A6, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the deviation) executed while the plurality of privilege games are executed is also the special dynamic display period. Is configured to be set. As a result, the dynamic display for which the special dynamic display period is set is increased as compared with the configuration provided with the gaming machine A6, but a state advantageous to the player is provided when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times. It has the effect of increasing the pattern.

In the gaming machine A8, when the special dynamic display period setting means is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the privilege game of 1 is compared with the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that the special dynamic display period is set so as to be different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any of the other privilege games by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means becomes advantageous by setting the special dynamic display period. It becomes possible to make it. As a result, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any of the other privilege games are different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Can be prevented. Therefore, by winning the award game a plurality of times, it becomes easier to provide an advantageous state to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered when the award game is won a plurality of times. effective.

Further, it is desirable that the predetermined period of the first period or less is different from that of the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privileged games at a wide range of timings without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In addition, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of any one of the privilege games is set to at least a predetermined period of at least the first period or more with respect to the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The special dynamic display period may be set so as to be different. By doing so, it is possible to greatly change the execution timing of the privilege game that is executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A9, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured so that the special dynamic display period can be set up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the said Among the execution timings of the privilege games executed a plurality of times, the predetermined number of times is set so that the interval of the execution timings of the privilege games farthest from the one operation period is wider than the second period. The gaming machine A10, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a special dynamic display period can be set for each of the privilege games executed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is variable. A predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so that the means is wider than the disadvantaged second period. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, at least until the privilege game corresponding to the specific discrimination result is executed, the said An advantageous privilege game discriminating means for determining whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which the ball can pass through the specific area, and an information notification means for notifying discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discriminating means. The gaming machine A11 characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before the privilege game is executed, it is possible to notify the determination information reflecting the determination result of whether the privilege game executed this time is a privilege game advantageous to the player. Therefore, even if the award game is won multiple times, the content of the notified information can be different, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced when the award game is won a plurality of times. It has the effect of suppressing.

The information notification means for notifying the information reflecting the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determination means may be any notification mode that can be recognized by the player, for example, on a liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81). Preliminary discrimination information reflecting the discrimination result of the advantageous privilege game discrimination means may be notified as an effect, or may be notified using the sound output from the speaker. Further, the light emitting means (LED or the like) provided in the gaming machine may be used for notification.

In any of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the ball entry information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the pre-discrimination information determined by the pre-discrimination means are described above. When it is determined that the information indicates the privilege game, whether the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which the ball can pass through the specific area or the privilege game is a disadvantageous privilege game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area. The second pre-determination means for pre-determining and the second pre-determination means for pre-determining the ball entry information by the second pre-determination means are discriminated by the second pre-determination means. The gaming machine A12 comprising a second pre-discrimination information notifying means for notifying the discriminating information.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A7 to A11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second pre-determination for the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the second pre-determination information can be notified by the time the determination condition of the ball entry information is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privileged game to be executed soon is an advantageous privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to diversify the effect to be executed.

The gaming machine A12 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying a continuous dynamic display for any of the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect executing means is The gaming machine A13, characterized in that it executes an effect that reflects the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to execute a continuous effect reflecting the second pre-determination information for the continuous dynamic display. As a result, not only whether or not there is information corresponding to the privilege game in the ball entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is information corresponding to the advantageous privilege game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the determination result of the above by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed.

In the game machine A13, the privilege game effect setting means for setting the privilege game effect associated with the execution of the privilege game, the privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means, and the above-mentioned When the privilege game effect is set by the privilege game effect setting means, the privilege game effect setting means has a continuous effect determining means for determining whether or not the continuous effect is in progress, and the privilege game effect setting means is in the continuous effect. The game A14 is characterized in that a specific privileged game effect is set when it is determined by the determination means that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the privilege game is executed during the period in which the continuous effect is executed, it is possible to execute a specific privilege game effect for the continuous effect as the privilege game effect. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous production can be provided to the player without discomfort.

In the gaming machine A14, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the continuous effect continues in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A game machine A15 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed during the period in which the continuous effect is executed, the effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued is executed. Therefore, if the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous production, the continuous suggestion effect is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of the privileged game a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine A14 or A15, the privileged game effect setting means suggests that the present privileged game is an advantageous privileged game in the case of the privileged game corresponding to the advantageous privileged game as the specific privileged game effect. A game machine A16 characterized in that a suggestion effect is set.

According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A14 or A15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the suggestion effect suggesting that the current privilege game is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous production, the suggestion effect is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that an advantageous state is provided to the player. It is possible to recognize that. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the execution of the privileged game a plurality of times.

Here, in the configuration including the gaming machine A15, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous production, the continuation suggestion effect is executed when the disadvantageous privilege game is executed, and the advantageous privilege game is executed. The suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, the continuous production is executed until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed. It can be executed as a continuous production of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

<Characteristic B group> (There is a period when multiple small hits are executed advantageously)
The discrimination means that executes the discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the display means that displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the discrimination after dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period. A dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the means, and a privilege for executing a privilege game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information based on the specific discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter when the privilege game is executed by the game execution means and the privilege game execution means, and a variable ball-entry means thereof. In a gaming machine having a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege advantageous to the player based on the passage of the ball through the specific area, the specific area A variable means capable of alternately varying between an advantageous state in which the ball can pass and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state, and the variable means is either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state. Based on the variable control means that variably controls the variable means and the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the period from the change to one state to the next change to the one state is set as one operation period. It is characterized by having a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privileged game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period. Game machine B1.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device opened by a privilege game (small hit game, etc.) and a specific area provided in the variable winning device in which a big hit game is executed by passing a ball. The guide member that guides the ball to the specific region, the mode in which the ball easily passes through the specific region, and the mode in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific region are controlled to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which a means is provided and the opening operation of a variable winning device based on a small hit game and the control operation of a guiding member are made independent to randomly generate a big hit game in a specific small hit game. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, since the timing at which the variable winning device is opened by the small hit game and the timing at which the mode of the guiding member changes are independent without any relation, the specific area can be set no matter how many times the small hit game is repeated. There is a problem that the player cannot pass through and the player's motivation to play may be reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

According to the gaming machine B1, the privilege game is performed so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled into an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It can be executed multiple times. Therefore, when the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed during the period when the variable means is in an advantageous state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B1, a ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a ball entry information acquisition means for acquiring ball entry information based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and a ball entry information acquisition means thereof. The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it has a storage means for storing at least a plurality of ball entry information acquired by the above-mentioned determination condition until the determination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by storing a plurality of ball entry information by the storage means, it is possible to sequentially execute a plurality of dynamic displays. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period, there is an effect that the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times can be increased.

The gaming machine B1 or B2 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, as the discrimination result by the discrimination means, in addition to the discrimination result for executing the privilege game, there is a discrimination result for setting the specific game state. There is an effect that various games can be provided to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.

The gaming machine B2 or B3 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the storage means stores a predetermined number or more of the ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B2 or B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific game state is set when the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means is stored in a predetermined number or more. As a result, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically play the game in order to have the storage means always store a predetermined number or more of balls, which has an effect of enhancing the operation of the game.

In the gaming machines B1 or B4, the specific gaming state setting means has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period in which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the dynamic display means. The period setting means is characterized by having a special dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a special dynamic display period, which is a dynamic display period shorter than usual, when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Game machine B5.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period setting means sets a special dynamic display period, which is a shorter dynamic display period than usual. Thereby, it is possible to execute the dynamic display a plurality of times within one operation period. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed multiple times so that the ball reaches the variable means multiple times within one operation period, the variable means can be in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game multiple times. It is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege game in which the ball can reach the variable means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In the configuration provided with the gaming machine B2, since a plurality of ball entry information can be stored in the storage means, a situation may occur in which the dynamic display is interrupted when a special dynamic display period is set. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In the gaming machine B5, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the ball entry assist state in which the ball entry information is easily stored in the storage means is set. A gaming machine B6 having an auxiliary state setting means.

According to the gaming machine B6, before the special dynamic display period is set, it is possible to set the ball entry assist state in which the ball entry information is easily stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the special dynamic display period can be easily set in the state where a plurality of ball entry information is stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the situation where the specific game state is interrupted in the middle can be suppressed.

As the ball entry assist state setting means, for example, a state in which the ball entry information can be easily stored in the storage means is set by setting a long dynamic display time, or the ball entry into the ball entry means is restricted. It is conceivable that the regulating means for controlling the ball is changed to a state in which the entry of the ball is not regulated.

In the game machine B6, the ball entry assist state setting means is characterized in that a predetermined dynamic display period is set as the dynamic display period in which the dynamic display is performed.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, it is possible to set a state in which the storage means can easily store the entry information simply by using a configuration in which a predetermined dynamic display period is set. , There is an effect that the situation where the specific game state is interrupted in the middle can be easily suppressed.

As the predetermined dynamic display period, a period during which a plurality of balls can be inserted into the ball entry means may be set, for example, a dynamic display period of about 30 seconds may be set. .. Further, if the dynamic display period is intentionally set for the purpose of allowing a plurality of balls to enter the ball entry means, it is included in the dynamic display period longer than usual.

Further, as the target for which the predetermined dynamic display period is set, the dynamic display of the identification information in which the determination result of the determination means becomes the predetermined determination result, or the action that is executed first after the specific game state is set. Display etc. can be considered.

Here, the following configuration may be used as a means for achieving the same effect as that of the game machine B7. That is, a predetermined dynamic display period may be set when it is determined that the number of stored ball entry information is equal to or less than a predetermined number during the specific game state. In this case, the predetermined number is preferably at least 1 or more. This is because the determination by the determination means is executed at least a plurality of times in the remaining specific game states to be executed after the predetermined dynamic display period is set. As a result, the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means during the specific game state becomes a predetermined number or less, and even after the predetermined dynamic display period is set, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state. Is possible.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the specific gaming state setting means is characterized by having a variable control period extending means for extending the one operation period variably controlled by the variable control means. Pachinko machine B8.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific gaming state is set, one operation period in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control period extending means is extended. Therefore, since the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable control means, the variable means is in an advantageous state by winning the privilege game a plurality of times. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B8, the variable control period extending means extends the first period of the one operating period.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B8, the first period of one operation period of the variable control means is extended, so that the ball is moved to the variable means within the period when the variable means becomes advantageous. It is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game will be executed so as to reach it. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

A gaming machine B10, wherein in any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the specific gaming state setting means has a privileged gaming period shortening means for shortening a period in which the privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the period during which the privilege game is executed can be shortened. The privilege game can be executed multiple times so that the ball reaches multiple times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine B10, the privileged gaming period shortening means shortens the period in which the variable ball entering means is closed in the period during which the privileged game is executed.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B10, it is possible to shorten the period during which the variable ball entry means is closed during the period during which the privilege game is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the privilege game is executed so that the ball reaches the variable means within the period in which the variable means becomes advantageous, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, the player's game It has the effect of suppressing a decrease in motivation.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the specific gaming state setting means sets the specific gaming state until the determination by the discrimination means is executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific game state can be set until the determination by the determination means is executed a predetermined number of times. Therefore, since the gaming state that is advantageous to the player is provided within a limited range, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a period that gives the player a sense of expectation.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, the privilege game is executed at least until the privilege game based on the specific discrimination result is executed. Having an advantageous privilege game determining means for determining whether or not the game is an advantageous privilege game in which the ball can pass through a specific area, and an information notifying means for notifying information based on the determination result of the advantageous privilege game determining means. Characteristic gaming machine B13.

According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, before the privilege game is executed by the information notification means, information based on the determination result of whether the privilege game executed this time is a privilege game advantageous to the player is notified. Therefore, even if the award game is won consecutively, the content of the notified information can be different, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced when the award game is won a plurality of times. It has the effect of suppressing this.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B13, the pre-discrimination means for discriminating the ball entry information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied, and the pre-discrimination information determined by the pre-discrimination means are described above. When it is determined that the information indicates the privilege game, the privilege game is an advantageous privilege game in which the ball can pass through the specific area, or a disadvantageous privilege game in which the ball is more difficult to pass through the specific area than the advantageous privilege game. The second pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the ball is, and the second pre-determination means for pre-determining the ball entry information are discriminated by the second pre-determination means during the period until the discrimination is performed. The gaming machine B14 is characterized by having a second pre-determination information notifying means for notifying the second pre-determining information.

According to the gaming machine B14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by executing the second pre-determination for the ball entry information stored in the storage means, the second pre-discrimination information is notified during the period until the discrimination of the ball entry information is executed by the discrimination means. can do. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance whether the privileged game to be executed soon is an advantageous privileged game that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to diversify the effect to be executed.

The gaming machine B14 has a continuous effect executing means capable of executing a continuous effect accompanying continuous dynamic display for any of the ball entry information stored in the storage means, and the continuous effect executing means is The gaming machine B15, characterized in that it executes an effect based on the second prior determination information.

According to the gaming machine B15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is possible to execute a continuous effect reflecting the second pre-determination information for the continuous dynamic display. As a result, not only whether or not there is information corresponding to the privilege game in the ball entry information stored in the storage means, but also whether or not there is information corresponding to the advantageous privilege game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify the determination result of the above by continuous display accompanying a plurality of dynamic displays, and it is possible to diversify the effects to be executed.

In the game machine B15, the privilege game effect setting means for setting the privilege game effect associated with the execution of the privilege game, the privilege game effect execution means for executing the privilege game effect set by the privilege game effect setting means, and the above-mentioned When the privilege game effect is set by the privilege game effect setting means, the privilege game effect setting means has a continuous effect determining means for determining whether or not the continuous effect is in progress, and the privilege game effect setting means is performing the continuous effect. The game B16 is characterized in that a specific privileged game effect is set when it is determined by the determination means that the continuous effect is being performed.

According to the gaming machine B16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even if the privilege game is executed during the period in which the continuous effect is executed, it is possible to execute the privilege game effect for the continuous effect as the privilege game effect. Therefore, there is an effect that continuous production can be provided to the player without discomfort.

In the gaming machine B16, the privilege game effect setting means sets, as the specific privilege game effect, a continuation suggestion effect suggesting that the continuous effect continues in the case of the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game. A gaming machine B17 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine B17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the effect suggesting that the continuous effect is continued is executed. Therefore, if the privilege game is won multiple times during the continuous production, the continuous suggestion effect is executed even if the privilege game corresponding to the disadvantageous privilege game is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize that the game has been executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the privileged game effect setting means suggests that the present privileged game is an advantageous privileged game in the case of the privileged game corresponding to the advantageous privileged game as the specific privileged game effect. The gaming machine B18, characterized in that a suggestion effect is set.

According to the gaming machine B18, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B16 or B17, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the suggestion effect suggesting that the current privilege game is the advantageous privilege game is executed. Therefore, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous production, the suggestion effect is executed when the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed, so that an advantageous state is provided to the player. It is possible to recognize that. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine B17, when the privilege game is won a plurality of times during the continuous production, the continuation suggestion effect is executed when the disadvantageous privilege game is executed, and the advantageous privilege game is executed. The suggestion effect is executed. Therefore, even if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the continuous production, the continuous production is executed until the privilege game corresponding to the advantageous privilege game is executed. It can be executed as a continuous production of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

<Characteristic C group> (There is a period when multiple small hits are likely to be executed)
Discrimination is executed based on the ball-entry means on which the ball can enter, the ball-entry information acquisition means for acquiring the ball-entry information based on the ball entering the ball-entry means, and the establishment of the discrimination condition. The discrimination means, the display means for displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for a predetermined period, and then the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is stopped and displayed. It is advantageous for the player when the dynamic display means for causing the pachinko machine and the identification information based on the specific determination result that the ball entry information is determined to be the specific ball entry information by the discrimination means are stopped and displayed on the display means. The privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, the specific area where the ball can pass when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, and the ball in the specific area. A specific gaming state that facilitates acquisition of the specific entry information based on the establishment of specific conditions in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means that grants a privilege that is advantageous to the player when passing through. The predetermined condition is satisfied when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times in a state where the specific game state setting means to be set and the special condition that can be satisfied in the specific game state set by the specific game state setting means are satisfied. The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a setting means for setting at least one of the privileged games to be executed among the privileged games to be executed a plurality of times.

Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a variable winning device opened by a privilege game (small hit game, etc.) and a specific area provided in the variable winning device in which a big hit game is executed by passing a ball. By providing a guiding member that guides the sphere to the specific region, a mode in which the sphere easily passes through the specific region, and a mode in which the sphere is difficult to pass through the specific region, the control means is provided. A pachinko machine capable of providing a jackpot game when passing through a specific area after winning a winning game has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206309). In this case, in order to provide the big hit game with a predetermined probability, it is necessary to execute the small hit game with a probability higher than the predetermined probability, so that the small hit game may occur frequently, and the player is not allowed. There was a problem that the player had a pleasant sensation and the player's motivation to play was reduced. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Since the gaming machine C1 has a specific gaming state in which specific entry information can be easily acquired, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of privileged games in a normal state other than the specific gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Further, in the specific game state, the privilege game is likely to occur frequently, but if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times during the specific game state, it is possible to make the game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the frequent occurrence of privileged games.

The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the discrimination result by the discrimination means includes the discrimination result for setting the specific game state in addition to the discrimination result for executing the privilege game. There is an effect that a variety of games can be provided to the player based on the determination result of.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a storage means for storing a plurality of the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is the storage means. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it is established by storing a predetermined number or more of ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a special condition is satisfied when a predetermined number or more of ball entry information is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in order to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish the special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a storage means for storing a plurality of ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied, and the special condition is provided in the storage means. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that it is established when the privileged games are executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of stored ball entry information.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a special condition is satisfied when a plurality of privilege games are executed in a predetermined order corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in order to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish the special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C4, the predetermined order is the gaming machine C5, wherein the privileged games are continuously executed a predetermined number of times.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the privilege games are executed consecutively and the privilege games are executed a plurality of times in a predetermined order, at least one of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is a specific area. It is set to be executed in a state where the ball can pass through. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to play the game in order to store a large amount of ball entry information in the storage means so that the privileged game is continuously executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the ball entry means is provided separately from the first ball entry means on which the ball can enter and the first ball entry means, and the opening condition is satisfied. Has a second ball-entry means that enables the ball to enter, and the ball enters the second ball-entry means rather than the first ball-entry information acquired based on the ball-entry to the first ball-entry means. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the second ball entry information acquired based on the ball has the specific ball entry information set higher.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the ball entry means, the first ball entry means on which the ball can enter and the second entry means in which the ball can enter based on the fact that the opening condition is satisfied separately from the first ball entry means. The ball means is provided, and the second ball entry information acquired based on the entry into the second entry means is more than the first entry information acquired based on the entry into the first entry means. Specific entry information is set high. This has the effect that the frequency with which the privilege game is executed can be reduced until the opening condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine C6, a second discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, a second display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a second display thereof. After the identification information is dynamically displayed on the means for a predetermined period, it is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means that stops and displays the identification information based on the discrimination result by the second discrimination means and the second dynamic display means. The second dynamic display period setting means for setting the second dynamic display period of the identification information and the second dynamic display means stop and display the identification information based on the specific second determination result on the second display means. In this case, the player has a second privilege game execution means for executing the second privilege game that satisfies the opening condition of the second ball entry means, and the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the predetermined discrimination result. In addition, as the second dynamic display period set by the second dynamic display period setting means, the second special dynamic display period, which is a second dynamic display period shorter than usual, is set. A gaming machine C7 having a period setting means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means is a specific second discrimination result and the identification information based on the specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the second display means by the second dynamic display means, The second privilege game execution means has a configuration in which the opening condition of the second ball entry means is satisfied, and when the judgment result by the judgment means is a predetermined judgment result, it is set by the second dynamic display period setting means. As the second dynamic display period, a second dynamic display period shorter than usual is set. Thereby, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which the ball can easily enter the second ball entry means.

Here, in the configuration including the gaming machine C5, since the second ball entry means is easier to acquire the specific ball entry information than the first ball entry means, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a predetermined discrimination result. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming state in which a plurality of specific ball entry information can be easily acquired, that is, a plurality of privileged games can be easily executed.

In any of the game machines C3 to C7, the storage means has a first storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the first ball entry information and a second storage unit capable of storing a plurality of the second ball entry information. Then, the second special condition is further provided as the special condition, and the second special condition stores a predetermined number of ball entry information that is larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit. A game machine C8 characterized in that it can be established in the above.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a special condition is obtained when the number of ball entry information stored in the storage means is larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit, that is, when the ball entry information is stored in at least the second storage unit. Is established. As a result, in a gaming state in which the privilege game is likely to be executed, if the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in order to store a large amount of entry information in the storage means in order to establish the special condition. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine C8, the second special condition is a predetermined number of the specific ball entry information in a state where the storage means stores a predetermined number of ball entry information larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in the first storage unit. The gaming machine C9, which is established when the above is memorized.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second special condition is satisfied when the storage means stores a predetermined number of ball entry information that is larger than the upper limit that can be stored in the first storage unit and stores a predetermined number or more of the specific ball entry information. To do. Therefore, the conditions for satisfying the second special condition can be complicated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, based on the execution of the privilege game, the pachinko / pachislot machines C1 to C9 have a variable ball-entry means that changes from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter. , The gaming machine C10 characterized in that the specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since a specific area is provided in the variable ball entry means that changes to the open state based on the execution of the privilege game, it is possible to execute the game aiming at the specific area only when the privilege game is executed. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the game value for the privilege game, and therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered when the privilege game is won a plurality of times. ..

In the gaming machine C10, a variable means provided in the variable ball entry means and capable of being variable between an advantageous state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area, and its variable. It has a variable control means that alternately changes the means into the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable means is changed to the advantageous state by the variable control means. A gaming machine C11 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means is configured so that the variable means can be variably controlled into an advantageous state in which the sphere easily passes through the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the sphere is difficult to pass. Predetermined conditions that can be passed are satisfied. As a result, when the variable means is in an advantageous state, the privilege game is executed and the ball that has entered the variable entry means can pass through the specific area, so that the difficulty level of the ball passing through the specific area is increased. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C11, the variable control means variably controls the variable means so as to be repeatedly changed to the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the variable control means repeatedly changes the variable means into an advantageous state and a disadvantageous state at a predetermined cycle, the timing at which the variable means becomes the advantageous state is randomized with respect to the timing at which the privilege game is executed. Is possible. Therefore, since the ball that has entered the variable ball entry means at various timings may pass through the specific area, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game.

In any of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the variable control means has the variable third period, which is a combination of the first period in which the advantageous state is obtained and the second period in which the disadvantageous state is obtained, as one operation period. The means is variably controlled, the setting means has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period of identification information corresponding to the privilege game, and the dynamic display period setting means is said. When the award game is executed a plurality of times, the award game of 1 and any of the other award games are executed at different timings with respect to the one operation period. The gaming machine C13 is characterized by having a special dynamic display period setting means for setting a special dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the game.

According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C10 to C12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable control means variably controls the variable means with the third period, which is the sum of the first period in the advantageous state and the second period in the disadvantageous state, as one operation period, and the dynamic display period of the setting means. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game is set by the setting means. Then, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times by the special dynamic display period setting means possessed by the dynamic display period setting means, the privilege game of 1 and the other privilege games are performed at different timings for one operation period. A special dynamic display period is set so that any of the above-mentioned privilege games is executed. By doing so, it is possible to set a privilege game that can pass through a specific area and a privilege game that is difficult to pass through a specific area by changing the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the burden of processing related to the game can be reduced as compared with the case where the privilege game that can pass through the specific area and the privilege game that is difficult to pass through the specific area are set.

Here, in the configuration provided with the gaming machine C5, among the privileged games executed continuously, the privileged game to be executed first (the first privileged game (corresponding to any other privileged game)) On the other hand, the special dynamic display period is set so that the execution timing of the next privileged game (the second privileged game (corresponding to the first privileged game)) is different. That is, by setting the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the second privilege game as the special dynamic display period, the execution timing of the privilege games to be continuously executed can be changed to one operation period of the variable means. Can be different from. As a result, since the target for setting the special dynamic display period is only the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the privilege game, there is an effect that the program capacity for executing the game process can be reduced.

In the configuration without the gaming machine C5, the dynamic display period of the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display corresponding to the deviation) executed while the plurality of privilege games are executed is also a special dynamic display. It is configured to set the period. As a result, the pattern that provides the player with an advantageous state when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times is increased from the configuration in which the dynamic display for which the special dynamic display period is set is provided with the gaming machine C5. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine C13, when the special dynamic display period setting means is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the privilege game of 1 is compared with the execution timing of any of the other privilege games. The gaming machine C14 is characterized in that the special dynamic display period is set so as to be different by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the execution timing of one privilege game is different from the execution timing of any of the other privilege games by a predetermined period equal to or less than the first period in which the variable means becomes advantageous by setting the special dynamic display period. It becomes possible to make it. As a result, when the execution timing of one privilege game and the execution timing of any of the other privilege games are different, the execution timing of each privilege game is set across the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state. Can be prevented. Therefore, by winning the award game a plurality of times, it becomes easier to provide an advantageous state to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from being lowered when the award game is won a plurality of times. effective.

Further, it is desirable that the predetermined period of the first period or less is different from that of the first period. By doing so, it is possible to execute a plurality of privileged games at a wide range of timings without straddling the first period in which the variable means is in an advantageous state, so that a game state advantageous to the player is provided. It is possible to increase the probability of being done. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

When the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the execution timing of the privilege game 1 is different from the execution timing of any of the other privilege games by at least a predetermined period of the first period or more. The special dynamic display period may be set as described above. By doing so, it is possible to greatly change the execution timing of the privilege game that is executed a plurality of times.

In the gaming machine C14, the special dynamic display period setting means is configured so that the special dynamic display period can be set up to a predetermined number of times, and when the special dynamic display period is set the predetermined number of times, the said Among the execution timings of the privilege games executed a plurality of times, the predetermined number of times is set so that the interval of the execution timings of the privilege games farthest from the one operation period is wider than the second period. The gaming machine C15, which is characterized by being a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine C15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a special dynamic display period can be set for each of the privilege games executed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of times, and the farthest interval among the execution timings of the privilege games executed a plurality of times is variable. A predetermined number of times the special dynamic display period is set is set so that the means is wider than the disadvantaged second period. As a result, when the special dynamic display period is set a predetermined number of times, the privilege game can be executed at a timing other than the second period in any of the privilege games for which the special dynamic display period is set. That is, it is possible to reliably provide a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play when the privileged game is won a plurality of times.

<Characteristic D group> (Structure that makes it easy to win a V prize by winning consecutive small hits)
A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition, and a ball entry means capable of entering the ball when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means. A variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows the ball to enter the ball entry means and a regulated position that restricts the entry of the ball, and a predetermined condition are satisfied by being provided in the ball entry means. A plurality of the above-mentioned privilege games are provided in a gaming machine having a specific area through which the ball can pass and a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on the ball passing through the specific area. When the ball is executed a number of times, a ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted by the variable means located at the regulation position during the privilege game is sent to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. It has a guiding means capable of guiding the player, and a setting means for setting at least one of the following and subsequent privilege games to be executed during the period when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Characteristic gaming machine D1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in a small hit game in which a winning opening is opened, a first small hit game in which a variable ball entering means is opened and closed in a manner in which a ball is easy to enter, and a mode in which a ball is difficult to win. A gaming machine having a second small hit game that opens and closes the variable ball entry means has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233195). With such a gaming machine, it is difficult to get the ball into the winning opening even if the second small hit game is won, and when the second small hit game is continuously won, the player is asked. Since there is no advantage, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play is reduced when a plurality of second small hit games are won. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

According to the gaming machine D1, when the privilege game is executed a plurality of times, the ball whose entry into the ball entry means is restricted during the privilege game is guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. It has a possible configuration. Further, it has a configuration in which at least one of the following privilege games is set to be executed in a state where the ball can pass through the specific area. Therefore, when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player is in an advantageous state, and therefore, when the award game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. ..

The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the guiding means includes a flow-down passage through which the ball can flow down and a flow-down period extending means for extending the period during which the ball flows down the flow-down passage. D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by extending the period during which the ball flows down the flow-down passage by the flow-down period extension means, the ball flowing down the flow-down passage is allowed to flow down to a position where the ball can enter the ball-entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the ball can be more reliably guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the gaming machine D2, a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means that dynamically displays the identification information for a predetermined period of time. After that, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and the dynamic display period setting means for setting the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. And, the specific condition is satisfied when the identification information based on the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means, and the flow-down period extension means is said. A game characterized in that the period during which the ball flows down the flow passage is longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one of the following award games. Machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the period during which the ball flows down the flow-down passage is set to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to at least one privilege game among the subsequent and subsequent privilege games. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more reliably guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to 3, the ball-entry means has a first opening through which a ball can enter and a second opening provided separately from the first opening, and the guiding means. D4 is a gaming machine D4 for guiding a ball whose entry into the first opening is restricted by the variable means located at the restricted position to the second opening.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means has the first opening and the second opening, and the ball whose entry to the first opening is restricted is guided to the second opening by the guiding means. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the ball can be more reliably guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the gaming machine D4, the variable means has a covering member that covers the first opening and the second opening when the variable means is located at the regulated position, and the covering member has a ball that can roll on the upper surface thereof. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the second opening has a wider region covered by the covering member than the first opening.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the variable means has a covering member capable of covering the first opening and the second opening, and the area where the second opening is covered by the covering member is wider than that of the first opening. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the second opening to enter the ball than the first opening, and when the privilege game is won a plurality of times, it is possible to make the state advantageous to the player. , When a privileged game is won a plurality of times, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In the gaming machine D4 or D5, the ball-entry means is a second guiding means that makes it easier for a ball that has entered through the second opening to enter the specific region than a ball that has entered through the first opening. The gaming machine D6, which is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4 or D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball that has entered through the second opening is configured to be easier to enter into a specific region than the ball that has entered through the first opening by flowing down the second guiding means. As a result, when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. effective.

In the gaming machine D6, a second variable means provided in the ball entry means and capable of being variable to an allowable position that allows the ball to pass through the specific area or a regulated position that restricts the passage of the ball into the specific area. The second variable control means is provided with a second variable control means that changes the second variable means to the allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed, and the second guiding means is provided from the first opening. The second passage, which is a passage until the ball entering from the second opening passes through the specific area, rather than the passage period of the first passage, which is the passage until the ball entering the ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the passing period of the machine is shortened.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows the ball to pass through the specific area or a regulated position that restricts the passage of the ball to the specific area is provided in the ball entry means, and the second variable control means is used. The second variable means is changed to an allowable position for a predetermined period after the privilege game is executed. Then, as the second guiding means, the first passage, which is the passage for the ball entering from the first opening to pass through the specific region, and the ball entering from the second opening to pass through the specific region. A second passage, which is a passage, is provided so that the passage period during which the ball passes through the second passage is shorter than the passage period during which the ball passes through the first passage. As a result, the ball entering through the second opening can easily pass through the specific region than the ball entering through the first opening. Therefore, when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. There is.

The period during which the variable means is in the allowable position by the second variable control means is set longer than the passage period during which the sphere passes through the first passage and shorter than the passage period during which the sphere passes through the second passage. May be good. By doing so, it is possible to limit the passage of the sphere passing through the passage other than the second passage through the specific area. Therefore, when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player can be in an advantageous state, and when the award game is won a plurality of times, the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. There is.

The gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the second passage is formed so that the slope of the downward slope is steeper than that of the first passage.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second passage formed with a steeper slope than the first passage, the speed at which the ball flows down can be increased as compared with the first passage.

Therefore, there is an effect that the ball winning the second opening can provide a more advantageous state for the player than the first opening.

In the gaming machine D7 or D8, the gaming machine D9 is characterized in that the second passage is formed at a shorter distance than the first passage.

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D7 or D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second passage can be set at a shorter distance than the first passage.

Therefore, there is an effect that the ball winning the second opening can be surely provided in a more advantageous state to the player than the first opening.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the ball is configured to be able to enter the ball, has the ball entry means, the variable means, and the guidance means, and the ball entry device has the ball entry device. A third guiding means capable of guiding the ball to the ball entering means, a discharge port capable of discharging the ball guided by the third guiding means to the outside of the ball entering device, and a ball to the discharge port. The third variable means has a third variable means that can be changed to an allowable position that allows passage and a regulated position that restricts the passage of the ball to the discharge port, and the third variable means executes the privilege game. The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that the third variable means is changed to the regulated position based on the above.

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a third guiding means for guiding the ball that has entered the ball into the ball entering device having the ball entering means, the variable means, and the guiding means to the ball entering means is provided. The third guiding means is provided with a discharge port capable of discharging the ball to the outside of the ball entering device, and by changing the third variable means, the ball guided by the third guiding means is discharged to the outside of the ball entering device. Switch between letting and guiding to the ball entry means. Then, in the third variable means, the third variable means is changed so as to guide the ball guided by the third guiding means to the entering means when the privilege game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from being guided to the ball entry means until the privilege game is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the ball from entering through the second opening when the privilege game is executed independently.

The gaming machine D11 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D10, the third variable means is variable in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D10, the third variable means changes in conjunction with the variable operation of the first variable means, so that the drive source for changing the variable means can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, by linking the variable operation of the third variable means with the first variable means that is variably controlled by executing the privilege game, there is an effect that the variable operation along with the privilege game can be performed.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the flow-down period extending means includes a flow-down distance extending means for extending the flow-down period by extending the flow-down distance of the flow-down passage. ..

According to the gaming machine D12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D11, the flow-down period extending means extends the flow-down distance of the flow-down passage by the flow-down distance extending means, so that the following is more reliable. There is an effect that the player can be guided to the ball entry means during the privilege game.

In the gaming machine D12, the flow-down distance extending means is a meandering flow-down passage in which the flow-down passage is formed in a meandering shape.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D12, since the meandering flow passage is used to extend the flow distance, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow passage can be reduced.

A game machine D14 in any of the game machines D2 to D13, wherein the flow-down period extending means includes a flow-down speed reducing means for reducing the speed of a ball flowing down the flow-down passage.

According to the gaming machine D14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D2 to D13, the flow-down period extending means reduces the speed of the ball flowing down the flow-down passage by the flow-down speed reducing means, so that it is more reliable. In addition, there is an effect that the player can be guided to the ball entry means during the next and subsequent privilege games.

In the game machine D14, the game machine D15 is characterized in that the flow-down speed reducing means is a speed-reducing member that reduces the flow-down speed of a ball.

According to the gaming machine D15, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D14, since the speed reducing member is used to reduce the flow-down speed, there is an effect that the space for installing the flow-down passage can be reduced.

As the speed reducing member, a member capable of reducing the flow speed of the sphere due to the friction generated between the objects can be considered. For example, it is preferable to use a member (urethane rubber or the like) having a high coefficient of friction that reduces the flow speed of the ball due to the frictional force generated when the ball rolls. Further, if a material having a larger rolling friction than the material used for the flow path is used, that material becomes a speed reducing member. For example, if the upper surface of the flow path of the other sphere is coated with a fluororesin (PTFE or the like), it may be formed of a synthetic resin such as ABS resin having a higher rolling friction than the upper surface of the flow path. Further, the case where the frictional force between the objects is increased and the flow speed of the ball is reduced by roughening the ball rolling surface of the flow passage or providing a protrusion is also included.

The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through a winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a privilege game (for example, a small hit game) is executed when the lottery result of a special symbol is a predetermined lottery result, and the ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game. A gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege (for example, a winning game) is given has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-30008).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, even if the privilege game is executed, the ball does not always pass through the specific area. Therefore, when the privilege game in which the ball does not pass through the specific area is executed a plurality of times, the game is played. There was a risk that the player's willingness to play would decrease.
The technical idea has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present technical idea is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, a display means that displays identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means thereof. After the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means for a predetermined period, the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means and the identification information based on the specific discrimination result are stopped and displayed on the display means. In that case, when the privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player and the privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means, the ball enters from a closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter. A variable ball-entry means that can be changed to a possible open state, a specific area provided in the variable ball-entry means, and a privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the ball passing through the specific area are given. A variable means having a privilege giving means, and a variable means capable of alternately changing an advantageous state in which the ball can pass to the specific area and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state, and the variable means thereof Variable control for variably controlling the variable means, with the period from the change to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state to the next change to the one state as one operation period. A specific game that sets a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period based on the means and the predetermined condition is satisfied. It has a state setting means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 acquires the entry information based on the entry means capable of entering the ball and the entry of the ball into the entry means in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1. It has a ball-entry information acquisition means to be used, and a storage means for storing a plurality of ball-entry information acquired by the ball-entry information acquisition means until at least the determination condition is satisfied.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result. Is what you do.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, and the specific gaming state setting means is a dynamic display in which identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. It has a dynamic display period setting means for setting a period, and the dynamic display period setting means can set a special dynamic display period which is a shorter dynamic display period than usual when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It has a special dynamic display period setting means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the ball enters the storage means at least before the special dynamic display period is set. It has a ball entry assist state setting means for setting a ball entry assist state in which information is easily stored.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the discrimination is executed by the discrimination means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition. After the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means for a predetermined time, the identification information based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means is stopped and displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. When the stop-displayed identification information is the identification information based on a specific determination result, the privilege game execution means executes the privilege game advantageous to the player. The variable means, which can be alternately changed to an advantageous state in which the sphere easily passes through a specific area or a disadvantageous state in which the sphere is difficult to pass, is changed to either an advantageous state or a disadvantageous state by the variable control means. From to the next change to one of the states is variably controlled as one operation period. Based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the specific game state setting means sets the specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period.
As a result, it is possible to execute the privilege game a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable means, so that the player's motivation to play is suppressed. It has the effect of being able to.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, based on the entry of the ball into the entry means, the entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and a plurality of the acquired entry information is stored by the storage means until at least the determination condition is satisfied. ..
This makes it possible to sequentially execute a plurality of dynamic displays. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the situation where the dynamic display is interrupted within one operation period, there is an effect that the possibility of executing the privilege game a plurality of times can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, a predetermined condition is satisfied when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result.
This has the effect of providing a variety of games to the player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of Technical Thoughts 1 to 3. That is, the dynamic display period setting means sets the dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special dynamic display period setting means dynamically displays the information shorter than usual. A special dynamic display period, which is a period, is set.
As a result, by executing the dynamic display a plurality of times within one operation period of the variable means, the privilege game is executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within one operation period. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the possibility that the privilege game is executed during the period when the variable means becomes advantageous can be increased.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4. That is, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least before the special dynamic display period is set, the ball entry assist state is set by the ball entry assist state setting means so that the ball entry information can be easily stored in the storage means.
As a result, the special dynamic display period can be easily set in a state where a plurality of ball entry information is stored in the storage means, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a situation in which the specific game state is interrupted in the middle.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
650 Second variable winning device (variable ball winning means)
650d V gate (variable means)
650e5 Passage detection switch (specific area)
S111 Variable control means S220 Bonus game execution means S407 Discrimination means S409 Setting means, ball entry assist state setting means S1306 Part of privilege granting means S1309 Part of privilege granting means S1707 Dynamic display means S2152 Specific game state setting means

Claims (1)

A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and
A display means for displaying identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a display means for displaying the identification information.
Dynamic display means that dynamically displays the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period and then stops and displays the identification information for showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means.
When the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game that is advantageous to the player, and the privilege game execution means.
When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means, a variable ball entry means that can be changed from a closed state in which the ball is difficult to enter to an open state in which the ball can enter, and
A specific area provided in the variable ball entry means and
In a gaming machine having a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player based on the passage of a ball through the specific area.
A variable means capable of alternately changing an advantageous state in which the ball can pass through the specific region and a disadvantageous state in which the ball is more difficult to pass than the advantageous state.
The variable means is variable, with the period from when the variable means is changed to either the advantageous state or the disadvantageous state to the next change to the one state as one operation period. Variable control means to control and
A specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state in which the privilege game can be executed a plurality of times so that the ball reaches the variable means a plurality of times within the one operation period based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. and, the possess,
The predetermined condition can be satisfied when the determination result by the determination means is continuously determined a predetermined number of times with a predetermined determination result other than the specific determination result.
The privilege game is at least set to a first type and a second type in which the variable ball entry means is changed so that the ball can easily pass through the specific area as compared with the first type. A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images